Home
/
Canon
/
iR2270 Series
/
Service Manual

Canon iR2270 Series, Service Manual

Share

Page: 230 / 1008

Canon iR2270 Series Service Manual Download Page 230

Chapter 5

　

5-22

5.3.6

Image Processing

5.3.6.1

Outline

0006-5930

iR2270 / iR2870 / iR3570 / iR4570 / iR3530

The following shows the major specifications and functions of the machine's image processing system:

T-5-8

F-5-25

The following shows the functions of the PCBs used by the machine's image processing system:

T-5-9

The machine uses the reader controller PCB to process images for every single image line; specific functions are as
follows:
1) Analog Image Processing
-CCD drive
-CCD output gain correction, offset correction
-CCD output A/D conversion
2) Digital Image Processing
-shading correction

CCD

number of lines: 1
Number of pixels: Total 7488 (Number of
effective pixels: 7180)
size of pixel: 32 x 46.9 ym

Shading correction

shading correction: executed for each job
shading adjustment: executed at power-on

Reader controller PCB

CCD drive, analog image processing, A/D
conversion, shading correction

Reader controller PCB

CCD

Analog image

processing block

Digital image

processing block

Shading

processing

Analog

image

processing

A/D

conversion

Contact image

sensor (CIS)

Controller block

«
...
228
229
230
231
232
...
»

Summary of Contents for iR2270 Series

Page 1: ...Jan 31 2005 Service Manual iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ... need arises In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright This ma...

Page 4: ...quiring care to avoid combustion fire Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question Provides a descri...

Page 5: ...sed to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field Therefore the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed they are explained in terms of from sensors to the in...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ... Configuration 1 17 1 1 15List of Print Transmission Optional Functions 1 18 1 1 16Printing Transmission Accessories System Configuration 1 19 1 1 17Functions of the Printing Transmission Functions 1 20 1 2 Product Specifications 1 22 1 2 1 Names of Parts 1 22 1 2 1 1 Names of Parts 1 22 1 2 1 2 External View 1 23 1 2 1 3 Cross Section 1 25 1 2 2 Using the Machine 1 28 1 2 2 1 Turning On the Power...

Page 8: ...2Before Starting the Work 230V 2 3 2 2 Unpacking and Installation 2 8 2 2 1Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials 2 8 2 2 2Installing the Toner Bottle 2 9 2 2 3Installing the Drum Unit 2 10 2 2 4Securing the Copier Main Unit 2 14 2 2 5Connecting the Cable 2 15 2 2 6Stirring Toner 2 15 2 2 7Setting the Cassettes 2 15 2 2 8APVC Correction of the Drum 2 16 2 2 9Adjusting the Image Position 2 ...

Page 9: ...3 1Overview 4 12 4 3 2Start Up Sequence 4 12 4 4 Shut Down Sequence 4 15 4 4 1Overview 4 15 4 4 2Overview w HDD 4 15 4 4 3Flow of Operation 4 15 4 4 4Flow of Operation w HDD 4 15 4 5 Image Processing 4 17 4 5 1Overview of the Image Flow 4 17 4 5 2Construction of the Image Processing Module 4 17 4 5 3Construction of the Image Processing Module 4 18 4 5 4Reader Unit Input Image Processing 4 19 4 5 5...

Page 10: ...onal 4 37 Chapter 5 Original Exposure System 5 1 Construction 5 1 5 1 1Specifications Control Mechanisms and Functions 5 1 5 1 2Major Components 5 2 5 1 3Construction of the Control System 5 4 5 1 4Reader Controller PCB 5 5 5 2 Basic Sequence 5 7 5 2 1Basic Sequence of Operation at Power On 5 7 5 2 2Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key book mode 1 original 5 7 5 2 3B...

Page 11: ...Removing the Reader Rear Cover 5 32 5 4 3 2 Removing the Scanner Motor 5 32 5 4 4 Contact sensor 5 33 5 4 4 1 Removing the Reader Front Cover 5 33 5 4 4 2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 5 33 5 4 4 3 Removing the Copyboard Glass 5 34 5 4 4 4 Removing the Contact Image Sensor CIS 5 35 5 4 4 5 After Replacement of the CIS 5 36 5 4 5 Copyboard Cover Open Close Sensor 5 36 5 4 5 1 Removing the Reader R...

Page 12: ...6 12 Chapter 7 Image Formation 7 1 Construction 7 1 7 1 1Specifications of the Image Formation System 7 1 7 1 2Major Components of the Image Formation System 7 2 7 2 Image Formation Process 7 4 7 2 1Image Formation Process outline 7 4 7 2 2Image Formation Process image formation 7 5 7 3 Basic Sequence 7 6 7 3 1Sequence of Operation initial rotation 7 6 7 3 2Sequence of Operation initial rotation 7...

Page 13: ...Lamp 7 26 7 12 1 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 7 26 7 12 1 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 7 26 7 12 1 3 Removing the Toner Cartridge 7 26 7 12 1 4 Removing the Drum Unit 7 27 7 12 1 5 Removing the Developing Assembly 7 28 7 12 1 6 Removing the Upper Tray 7 30 7 12 1 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 7 30 7 12 1 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 7 30 7 12 2 Drum Unit 7 31 7 12 2 1 Removing the...

Page 14: ...ving the Front Cover Unit 7 55 7 12 8 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 7 55 7 12 9 Toner Level Sensor 7 56 7 12 9 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 7 56 7 12 9 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 7 56 7 12 9 3 Removing the Toner Cartridge 7 57 7 12 9 4 Removing the Drum Unit 7 57 7 12 9 5 Removing the Developing Assembly 7 58 7 12 9 6 Removing the Upper Tray 7 60 7 12 9 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cov...

Page 15: ...put tray 8 14 8 1 14Diagram of Paper Paths w Finisher Q3 Saddle Finisher Q4 8 15 8 1 15Arrangement of Sensors 8 16 8 1 16Arrangement of Sensors 8 17 8 1 17Route of Drive 8 19 8 1 18Route of Drive 8 19 8 2 Basic Sequence 8 22 8 2 1Basic Sequence 8 22 8 2 2Increase in Speed 8 22 8 2 3Acceleration Intervals 8 25 8 2 4Increase in Speed 8 27 8 3 Detecting Jams 8 30 8 3 1 Delay Jams 8 30 8 3 1 1 Delay J...

Page 16: ...1 Removing the Pickup Roller Feed Roller Separation Roller 8 75 8 8 4 Sensor Mount 8 75 8 8 4 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 75 8 8 4 2 Removing the Right Door 8 75 8 8 4 3 Removing the Right Door 8 77 8 8 4 4 Removing the Right Cover lower front 8 77 8 8 4 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 8 78 8 8 4 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 8 78 8 8 4 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 8 78 8 8 4 8 M...

Page 17: ...0 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 96 8 8 10 2 Removing the Right Door 8 97 8 8 10 3 Removing the Right Door 8 98 8 8 10 4 Removing the Right Cover lower front 8 99 8 8 10 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 8 99 8 8 10 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 8 100 8 8 10 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 8 100 8 8 10 8 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor A B 8 101 8 8 11 Slide Resistor 8 101 8 8 1...

Page 18: ...g the Right Cover rear 8 123 8 8 17 2 Removing the Right Door 8 123 8 8 17 3 Removing the Right Door 8 125 8 8 17 4 Removing the Rear Cover 8 125 8 8 17 5 Removing the Main Power Switch 8 126 8 8 17 6 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Clutch 8 126 8 8 18 Manual Separation Pad 8 127 8 8 18 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 127 8 8 18 2 Removing the Right Door 8 127 8 8 18 3 Removing the Right Door 8 ...

Page 19: ...ion Delivery Kit 8 147 8 8 25 7 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1 8 148 8 8 26 Fixing Delivery Drive Assembly 8 149 8 8 26 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 149 8 8 26 2 Removing the Front Cover Unit 8 149 8 8 26 3 Removing the Delivery Tray 8 149 8 8 26 4 Removing the Right Door 8 150 8 8 26 5 Removing the Right Door 8 151 8 8 26 6 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1 8 151 8 8 26 7 Removing the Fixin...

Page 20: ... 5 2 3 Removing the Fixing Film Cover 9 18 9 5 2 4 Removing the Left Side Plate 9 18 9 5 2 5 Releasing the Locking Plate 9 19 9 5 2 6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit 9 20 9 5 2 7 Removing the Inlet Guide 9 21 9 5 2 8 Removing the Pressure Roller 9 21 9 5 3 Cleaning Roller 9 23 9 5 3 1 Removing the inside delivery cover unit 9 23 9 5 3 2 Removing the Cleaning Roller 9 25 9 5 4 Fixing Film 9 25 9 5 4 ...

Page 21: ... Unit 10 12 10 4 1 5 Connections to Various Accessories 10 13 10 4 1 6 Connections to Various Accessories 10 14 10 4 2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB 10 15 10 4 2 1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB 10 15 10 4 2 2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB 10 15 10 4 2 3 Rated Output of the Accessories Power Supply PCB 10 16 10 4 2 4 Rated Output of the All Night Powe...

Page 22: ... 5 6 7 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB 10 35 10 5 7 Control Panel Key Switch PCB 10 35 10 5 7 1 Removing the Control Panel 10 35 10 5 7 2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover 10 36 10 5 7 3 Removing the Control Panel Frame 10 36 10 5 7 4 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB 10 36 10 5 7 5 Removing the Control Panel 10 37 10 5 7 6 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover 10 38 10 5 7 7 R...

Page 23: ...the Right Door 10 56 10 5 12 15 Removing the Right Door 10 57 10 5 12 16 Removing the Fixing Unit 10 58 10 5 12 17 Removing the Gear 10 59 10 5 12 18 Removing the High Voltage PCB 10 60 10 5 13 Exhaust Fan 10 60 10 5 13 1 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan 10 60 10 5 13 2 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan 10 61 10 5 14 Motor of Main Drive Assembly 10 62 10 5 14 1 Removing the Rear Cover 10 62 10 5 14 2...

Page 24: ...1 1Standards for Image Position 13 1 13 1 2Adjusting the Image Position 13 1 13 1 3Cassette 13 3 13 1 4Manual Feed Tray 13 5 13 1 5Side Paper Deck 13 5 13 2 Scanning System 13 7 13 2 1After Replacement of the CIS 13 7 13 2 2After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or Initializing the RAM 13 7 13 3 Laser Exposure System 13 9 13 3 1After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit 13 9 13 4 Image Formation Sy...

Page 25: ...ted FAQ 14 18 14 2 4 1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications 14 18 14 2 4 2 FAQ on Send Specifications 14 21 14 2 4 3 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications 14 21 14 3 Outline of Electrical Components 14 23 14 3 1 Clutch Solenoid 14 23 14 3 1 1 Clutches and Solenoids 14 23 14 3 2 Motor 14 24 14 3 2 1 Motors 14 24 14 3 3 Fan 14 27 14 3 3 1 Fans 14 27 14 3 4 Sensor 14 28 14 3 4 1 Sensors 14 28 14 3 5 Switch 14 33 14...

Page 26: ...2 15 7 DADF Error Codes 15 82 15 7 1Error Code in Detail DF 15 82 Chapter 16 Service Mode 16 1 Outline 16 1 16 1 1Construction of Service Mode 16 1 16 1 2Starting Service Mode and Making Selections 16 2 16 1 3Ending Service Mode 16 3 16 1 4Back Up 16 3 16 1 5Initial Screen 16 3 16 1 62nd 3rd Item Screen 16 4 16 1 74th Item Screen 16 4 16 2 DISPLAY Status Display Mode 16 6 16 2 1 COPIER 16 6 16 2 1...

Page 27: ...hine 17 1 17 1 2Outline of the Service Support Tool 17 2 17 2 Making Preparations 17 7 17 2 1Registering the System Software 17 7 17 2 2Making Connections 17 9 17 3 Formatting the HDD 17 13 17 3 1Formatting All Partitions 17 13 17 3 2Formatting Selected Partitions 17 13 17 3 3Formatting Procedure 17 14 17 4 Downloading System Software 17 17 17 4 1 Downloading System 17 17 17 4 1 1 Outline 17 17 17...

Page 28: ...17 32 17 4 7 2 Downloading Procedure 17 33 17 4 8 Downloading G3 FAX 17 35 17 4 8 1 Outline 17 35 17 4 8 2 Downloading Procedure 17 36 17 4 9 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data 17 38 17 4 9 1 Outline 17 38 17 4 9 2 Uploading Procedure 17 39 17 4 9 3 Downloading Procedur 17 41 Chapter 18 Service Tools 18 1 Special Tools 18 1 18 2 Oils and Solvents 18 2 ...

Page 29: ...Chapter 1 Introduction ...

Page 30: ......

Page 31: ...ransmission Optional Functions 1 18 1 1 16 Printing Transmission Accessories System Configuration 1 19 1 1 17 Functions of the Printing Transmission Functions 1 20 1 2 Product Specifications 1 22 1 2 1 Names of Parts 1 22 1 2 1 1 Names of Parts 1 22 1 2 1 2 External View 1 23 1 2 1 3 Cross Section 1 25 1 2 2 Using the Machine 1 28 1 2 2 1 Turning On the Power Switch 1 28 1 2 2 2 When Turning Off t...

Page 32: ...pection 1 61 1 2 5 Safety 1 63 1 2 5 1 Safety of the Laser Light 1 63 1 2 5 2 CDRH Regulations 1 63 1 2 5 3 Handling the Laser Unit 1 64 1 2 5 4 Safety of Toner 1 65 1 2 6 Product Specifications 1 65 1 2 6 1 Product Specifications 1 65 1 2 7 Function List 1 68 1 2 7 1 Printing Speed 1 68 1 2 7 2 Printing Speed 1 69 1 2 7 3 Types of Paper 1 71 1 2 7 4 Types of Paper 1 72 ...

Page 33: ...tion 2 if delivery processing is limited to 3 way delivery delivery accessory system configuration 3 1 1 2 Overview of System Construction output accessories 0008 6919 iR3530 The output accessories designed for the machine can broadly be divided into 2 groups if the work is limited to stapling and the like output accessories configuration 1 if the work calls for 3 way sorting output accessories sy...

Page 34: ...llation Procedure Installation of the Finisher Q4 Installation of the Buffer Path Unit 4 3 Punch Unit L1 M1 N1 P1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Punch Unit L1 M1 N1 P1 4 Buffer Path Unit E1 4a Instruction Sheet indicating references 5 3 Way Unit A1 5a Installation Procedure Installation of the 3 Way Unit A1 6 2a 1a 3a 6a 4a 5a 1 3 4 2 5 ...

Page 35: ...20 230V model 6a Installation Procedure Installation of the Accessories Power Supply P2 Function provided Accessory needed 3 way delivery stapling Finisher Q3 or Saddle Finisher Q4 Accessories Power Supply P2 Buffer Path Unit E1 3 Way Unit A1 Function provided Accessory needed saddle binding Saddle Finisher Q4 Accessories Power Supply P2 Buffer Path Unit E1 3 Way Unit A1 Function provided Accessor...

Page 36: ...nstallation Procedure installation of the Output Tray J1 4 Accessories Power Supply P2 standard with 120 or 230 V model It is necessary when installing 1 4a Installation Procedure installation of the Accessories Power Supply P2 5 Inner Puncher Kit Q1 R1 S1 T1 5a Installation Procedure installation of the Inner Puncher Kit Q1 R1 S1 T1 6 Finisher Additional Tray B1 6a Installation Procedure installa...

Page 37: ...the following models 120V all model 230V iR4570 iR3570 Function Accessories needed 2 way delivery Stapling Finisher S1 Accessories Power Supply P2 3Way Unit A1 Output Tray J1 Function Accessories needed 3 way delivery Stapling Finisher S1 Accessories Power Supply P2 3Way Unit A1 Finisher Additional Tray B1 Output Tray J1 Function Accessories needed Punching Finisher S1 Accessories Power Supply P2 ...

Page 38: ...A1 3 Copy Tray J1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Copy Tray J1 4 Accessories Power Supply P2 needed when installing 1 standard with 120 230V model 4a Installation Procedure Installation of the Accessories Power Supply P2 5 Inner Puncher Kit Q1 R1 S1 T1 5a Installation Procedure Installation of the Inner Puncher Kit Q1 R1 S1 T1 6 Finisher Additional Tray B1 6a Installation Procedure I...

Page 39: ...y needed 2 way delivery stapling Finisher S1 Accessories Power Supply P2 3 Way Unit A1 Copy Tray J1 Function provided Accessory needed 3 way delivery stapling Finisher S1 Accessories Power Supply P2 3 Way Unit A1 Finisher Additional Tray B1 Copy Tray J1 Function provided Accessory needed punching Finisher S1 Accessories Power Supply P2 3 Way Unit A1 Inner Puncher Kit Q1 R1 S1 T1 ...

Page 40: ...Unit A1 comes as standard with the following models 120V all model 230V iR4570 iR3570 1 Inner 2 Way Tray D1 1a Installation Procedure installation of the Inner 2 Way Tray D1 2 3Way Unit A1 powered by host no need for Accessories Power Supply P2 2a Installation Procedure installation of the 3Way Unit A1 3 Output Tray J1 3a Installation Procedure installation of the Output Tray J1 3a 3 1a 2a 2 1 ...

Page 41: ...ypical system configuration 1 Inner 2 Way Tray D1 1a Installation Procedure Installation of the Inner 2 Way Tray D1 2 3 Way Unit A1 powered by the printer unit not requiring the Accessories Power Supply P2 2a Installation Procedure Installation of the 3 Way Unit A1 3 Copy Tray J1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Copy Tray J1 3a 3 1a 2a 2 1 ...

Page 42: ...2 Platen Cover Type H 3 Original Holder J1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Original Holder J1 4 Side Paper Deck Q1 4a Installation Procedure Installation of the Side Paper Deck Q1 5 Card Reader C1 Card Reader Mounting Kit B1 9 9a 1a 4a 10a 8a 6a 6 1 2 4 5 8 7 10 3 ...

Page 43: ...ette Pedestal Y2 7 Envelope Cassette C1 100V 8 Envelope Cassette Attachment C1 115 200V 8a Installation Procedure Installation of the Envelope Cassette Attachment C1 9 Accessories Power Supply P2 required when installing the Side Paper Deck Q1 4 standard with 120 230V model 9a Installation Procedure Installation of the Accessories Power Supply P2 10 DADF Handle A1 10a Installation Procedure Instal...

Page 44: ...over Type H 3 Document Tray J1 3a Installation Procedure installation of the Document Tray J1 4 Card Reader C1 Card Reader Mounting Kit B1 5 Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 6a Installation Procedure installation of the Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 6 Envelope Cassette C1 100 V 1a 7a 5a 5 1 2 4 7 6 3 ...

Page 45: ...iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 7 Envelope Cassette Attachment C1 115 200 V 8a Installation Procedure installation of the Envelope Cassettes Attachment C1 1 Reader Heater Unit B1 A Heater PCB C1 is needed for operation 2 Heater PCB C1 2a Installation Procedure Installation of the Heater PCB C1 Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 29 installation to the printer unit Installation of the Reader Heate...

Page 46: ...iR4570 The following shows a typical system configuration 1 Cassette Heater Unit 29 installation to the printer unit A Heater PCB C1 is needed for operation 2 Heater PCB C1 2a Installation Procedure Installation of the Heater PCB C1 Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 29 installation to the printer unit Installation to the Reader Heater Unit B1 2a 2 1 ...

Page 47: ...installation to the printer unit Installation of the Reader Heater Unit B1 2 Cassette Heater Unit 29 installation to the cassette pedestal Its operation requires the installation of the Heater PCB C1 and the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit B1 3 Cassette Heater Mounting Kit B1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit B1 Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 25 Inst...

Page 48: ...quires the installation of the Heater PCB C1 and the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit B1 2a Installation Procedure Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 29 Not used for mounting this unit to this model 3 Cassette Heater Mounting Kit B1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit B1 Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 25 Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 29...

Page 49: ...er Kit E1 N BootROM 4 Expansion Bus B1 5 USB Application Interface Board D1 6 iR256MB Expansion RAM B1 standard with 120V model 7 iR Security Kit A2 License 8 Super G3 Fax Board Q1 9 Multi FAX Board D1 for 120 V model 10 Univrsal Send Kit B1 License 11 Universal Send PDF Enhancement Kit B1 License for 120 V model 12 Universal Send PDF Encryption Kit B1 License for 230 V model 13 Universal Send Sea...

Page 50: ... Multi PDL Printer Kit E1 N BootROM Send function Univrsal Send Kit B1 Fax function 1 line Super G3 Fax Board Q1 Fax function 2 line Multi FAX Board D1 MEAP application USB connection function USB Application Interface Board D1 Expansion Bus B1 Security function HDD initialization encryption USB Application Interface Board D1 Expansion Bus B1 iR Security Kit A2 Encryption PDF function searchable P...

Page 51: ...56 MB Expansion RAM B1 installed MEAP function H boot N boot memory expansion needed without memory expansion the device will not operate E744 is displayed MEAP application USB connection function USB Application Interface Board D1 Expansion Bus B1 Security function HDD initialization encryption USB Application Interface Board D1 Expansion Bus B1 iR Security Kit A2 iR256MB Expansion RAM B1 Encrypt...

Page 52: ...Board Q1 6 PCI Bus Expansion Kit B1 7 Security Expansion Board USB D1 8 iR Security Kit A2 license certificate 1 1 17 Functions of the Printing Transmission Functions 0008 6933 iR3530 List of Print Transmission Optional Functions The following is a brief explanation of the functions expected of the accessories for details see the chapters that follow 1 8 7 4 5 2 3 6 ...

Page 53: ...ROM iR System Expansion Kit A1 UFR II PCL PS print function Multi PDL Printer Kit E1 N BootROM iR System Expansion Kit A1 Fax function 1 line Super G3 Fax Board Q1 iR System Expansion Kit A1 Security function HDD initialization encryption USB Application Interface Board D1 Expansion Bus B1 iR Security Kit A2 iR System Expansion Kit A1 ...

Page 54: ...3 Reader cover front 4 Control panel 5 Support cover right 6 Support cover 7 Delivery tray right cover 8 Delivery tray 9 Inside right cover 10 Front cover unit 11 Cassette 1 12 Cassette 2 13 Left cover lower 14 Left cover 15 Inside base cover 16 Left cover rear 17 Delivery tray rear cover lower 18 Delivery tray rear cover 1 3 2 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 5 4 6 7 9 8 15 17 ...

Page 55: ...21 Reader cover rear 22 Face over iR3570 4570 23 Rear cover 24 Right cover rear 25 Manual feed pickup tray 26 Right cover lower front 27 Right door unit 28 Delivery cover 29 Right cover upper 1 2 1 2 External View 0008 8229 iR3530 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 29 23 28 ...

Page 56: ...over right 6 Support cover 7 Delivery tray right cover 8 Delivery tray 9 Inside right cover 10 Front cover unit 11 Cassette 1 12 Cassette 2 13 Left cover lower 14 Left cover 15 Inside base cover 16 Left cover rear 17 Output tray rear cover lower 18 Output tray rear cover 1 3 2 10 11 12 13 14 16 15 18 5 4 6 7 8 9 17 ...

Page 57: ...cover 24 Right cover rear 25 Manual feed pickup tray 26 Right cover lower front 27 Right door unit 28 Delivery cover 29 Right cover upper 1 2 1 3 Cross Section 0007 9223 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 iR2270 iR2270F iR2870 iR2870F Model iR2230 iR2830 iR3530 iR2280F Model 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 23 ...

Page 58: ...Chapter 1 1 26 F 1 18 iR3570 iR3570F iR4570 iR4570F Model 7 21 22 23 24 27 28 1 2 3 11 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 4 29 26 5 6 12 25 8 9 10 14 ...

Page 59: ...er cassette 1 5 Drum unit 20 Separationroller cassette1 6 Drum cleaning unit 21 Vertical path roller 2 7 Delivery roller 22 Feed roller cassette 2 8 Fixing outlet roller 23 Separation roller cassette 2 9 Fixing film unit 24 Pickup roller cassette 2 10 Pressure roller 25 Primary charging roller 7 21 22 23 24 27 28 1 2 3 11 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 4 29 26 5 6 12 25 8 9 10 14 ...

Page 60: ... switch Normally i e unless the machine is in a sleep state the machine will be supplied with power when you turn on its main power switch F 1 20 iR4570 3570 2870 2270 11 Duplex feed roller 26 Developing unit 12 Photosensitive drum 27 Laser scanner unit 13 Duplex feed roller 2 28 Dust blocking sheet 14 Transfer roller 29 Sub hopper 15 Registration roller 1 2 3 ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 ...

Page 61: ...ain power switch Never turn off the main power while the display shows the progress bar indicating that the HDD is being accessed Otherwise the HDD may suffer a fault E602 This caution does not apply to models not equipped with a HDD F 1 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 3 1 2 Starting up Please wait ...

Page 62: ...tion When Receiving or Transmitting a Fax Before using the main power switch check to be sure that the Execute Memory lamp on the control panel is off Turning off the main power switch while an operation is under way can cause loss of data F 1 23 At Time of Downloading Do not turn off the main power switch while downloading is under way Otherwise the machine may not be able to operate normally C 0...

Page 63: ...6 iR3530 Before turning off the main power switch you must first press the control panel power switch When the Printer Unit Is in Operation or a Fax Is Being Received Check to be sure that the Execute Memory lamp on the control panel is off Otherwise the data being processed may be lost ON OFF ...

Page 64: ...Chapter 1 1 32 F 1 25 While Downloading Is Taking Place Do not turn off the main power switch or the control panel power switch Otherwise the machine may fail to operate ...

Page 65: ...26 1 2 2 4 Control Panel 0007 3163 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 F 1 27 O N O F F 1 2 3 Display Contrast Additional Function ON OFF Clear Error Start Memory Main Power 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ...

Page 66: ...ge contrast adjustment dial 5 Stop key 13 User Mode key 6 Start key 14 Help key 7 Main power lamp 15 Touch panel 8 Error lamp 1 Copy key 11 Execute Memory key 2 Fax key 12 Clear key 3 Box key 13 Keypad 4 Extension key 14 ID key 5 Control panel power switch 15 Image contrast adjustment dial 6 Check Counter key 16 Interrupt key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ...

Page 67: ...tem status screen as initial screen ON OFF give priority to device of system status screen ON OFF select post auto reset function use do not use set order of functions copy transmit Box remote scan or functions appearing on tab change order by Up Down key set order of function groups group A MEAP group B enable disable buzzer input sound ON OFF invalid input sound ON OFF supply alert sound ON OFF ...

Page 68: ...tray A receive fax 1 fax 2 tray B receive fax 1 fax 2 w inner tray tray A host middle tray lower tray B host middle tray upper tray A copy box printer receive fax other tray B copy box printer receive fax other fine setup for receive fax tray A receive fax1 fax 2 tray B receive fax 1 fax 2 w inner tray No 3 tray tray A host middle tray lower tray B host middle tray upper tray C No 3 tray tray A co...

Page 69: ...tray A copy Box printer receive fax other tray B copy Box printer receive fax other fine setup for receive fax tray A receive fax 1 fax 2 tray B receive fax 1 fax 2 Finisher S1 option tray No 3 tray tray A finisher optional tray tray B finisher output tray tray C No 3 tray tray A copy Box printer receive fax other tray B copy Box printer receive fax other tray C copy Box printer receive fax other ...

Page 70: ...ax 1 fax 2 fax Finisher S1 w o output option special tray items not indicated w o output option tray tray A host middle tray tray A copy Box printer receive fax other 1 output target therefore special tray items not indicated assign print priority copy 1 2 3 printer 1 2 3 Box 1 2 3 receive fax 1 2 3 other 1 2 3 register form for image merge register original size full merge see through merge 20 50...

Page 71: ...hift group rotation sort rotation group punch Z fold duplex on open to right open to top bottom off delete file after print ON OFF merge file ON OFF switch display language ON OFF reverse screen color ON OFF between job shift ON OFF put sheet between jobs On select source of paper OFF put sheet between sets On No of sets between 10 and 9999 select source of paper OFF indicate print wait time copy ...

Page 72: ...tside Japan Env 2 COM10 both Japan and outside Japan register paper type cassette 1 cassette 2 cassette 3 cassette 4 cassette 5 paper deck plain paper recycled paper colored paper punched paper power consumption in sleep low high select special tray w finisher w tray 3 tray A machine middle tray tray B tray 3 tray A copier box printer receive fax other tray B copier box printer receive fax other d...

Page 73: ...fax 1 fax 2 tray C receive fax 1 fax 2 Fin S1 optional tray tray A Fin optional tray tray B Fin output tray tray A copier box printer receive fax other tray B copier box printer receive fax other detail setup receive fax tray A receive fax 1 fax 2 tray B receive fax 1 fax 2 Fin S1 tray 3 tray A Fin output tray tray B tray 3 tray A copier box printer receive fax other tray B copier box printer fax ...

Page 74: ...Fin output tray upper tray B Fin output tray lower tray C machine middle tray tray A copier box printer receive fax other tray B copier box printer receive fax other tray C copier box printer receive fax other detail setup receive fax tray A receive fax 1 fax 2 tray B receive fax 1 fax 2 tray C receive fax 1 fax 2 if w o fax receive fax receive if fax only receive fax fax detail setup review fax a...

Page 75: ...rity on print side local print standard mode paper select auto cassette 1 through 5 number of prints 1 to 9999 sorter sort group staple sort shift sort shift group rotation sort rotation group punch hole z fold w o finisher w inner 2 way tray non sort sort rotation sort group rotation group duplex print ON open like book open like calendar OFF delete file after printing ON OFF merge file ON OFF sw...

Page 76: ... 10 15 20 30 40 50 min 1 hr 90 min 2 3 4 hr auto reset time 0 disable 1 2 9 min in 1 min increments set weekly timer 00 00 to 23 59 in 1 min increments everyday from Sun to Sat Mode Description fine tune time set date time 12 numerals time zone GMT 12 00 GMT 12 00 GMT 9 00 daylight saving ON OFF auto sleep time 10 sec 1 2 10 15 20 30 40 50 min 1 hr 90 min 2 3 4 hr auto clear time 0 none 1 2 9 min ...

Page 77: ... shipment set to 5 page print number of set prints adjust stamp position X 8 mm to 8 mm in 1 mm increments 0 mm Y 8 mm to 8 mm in 1 mm increment 0 mm clean feeder Start key Mode Description zoom fine adjust XY independent 1 0 to 1 0 in 0 1 increments 0 density correction copier box transmit each in 9 steps at time of shipment set to 5 feeder cleaning Start key Mode Description transmit setup trans...

Page 78: ...yes no list print fax user data list Do you want to print the user data list yes no list print network user list Do you want to print the user data list yes no configuration page font list PS status print font list LIPS emulation status print font list LIPS utility status print overlay list overlay print font list micro list form list color sample N201 utility status print overlay print ESCP utili...

Page 79: ...F set time 00 00 23 59 separate transmit and receive toggle ON OFF fax receive result report only if error ON OFF fax box review report ON OFF list print transmit address book list print list user data list Do you want to print the user data list yes no print list fax user data list Do you want to print the user data list yes no List print network user data list Do you want to print the user data ...

Page 80: ...ssion data size upper limit 0 none 1 through 99 MB 3 MB abbreviation name 40 characters attached image full mode transmissions time out 1 to 99 hr 24 hr MDN DSN reception print ON OFF notify always if error ON OFF user server route ON OFF fax setup transmission start speed 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps reception start speed 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2...

Page 81: ...00 to GMT 12 00 GMT 9 00 daylight saving time ON OFF register LDAP server register detail edit delete print list register license 24 characters set print ON OFF group ID ON OFF date ON OFF character ON OFF MEAP setup use HTTP ON OFF use SSL ON OFF print system info print set device info distribution register recipient auto search register register detail info delete auto distribution setup everyda...

Page 82: ...rs system administrator name 32 characters mail address 64 characters contact 32 characters comment 32 characters group ID control group ID control ON OFF register ID No register edit delete limit function count control clear count print all clear print job w unknown ID ON OFF scan job w unknown ID ON OFF set communicatio n control fax setup transmission start speed 33600bps 14400bps 9600bps 7200b...

Page 83: ...F limit new target ON OFF set device information device name 32 characters installation site 32 characters transfer settings reception method enable disable condition register register for unconditional transfer importance of e mail detail edit delete list print delete bulletin delete auto shift to on line off line shift to auto on line ON OFF shift to auto off line ON OFF date time setting set 12...

Page 84: ...n communicatio ns settings register source name 01 to 99 register edit 24 characters max delete register user abbreviation 24 characters max permit non ASCII code for FTP delete error file ON OFF transfer error processing always print save print off film photo mode OFF ON OFF number of retries 3 times 0 to 5 times change standard mode for transmission function read mode black and white machine def...

Page 85: ...d ON OFF cassette selection switch A ON OFF switch B ON OFF switch C ON OFF switch D ON OFF image reduction image reduction ON OFF reduction mode auto mode fixed mode rate of reduction in fixed mode E210to 75 to 97 in 1 increments 90 direction of reduction vertical and horizontal vertical only 2 on 1 record ON OFF reception info record add do not add set fax basic settings register user telephone ...

Page 86: ...lect reception mode fax tel switchover call start time 0 to 30 sec 8 call length 15 to 300 sec 17 operation after call end receive audio response ON OFF auto reception modem dial in fax tel switchover incoming ring on number of rings 0 to N times OFF remote reception on remote reception ID 00 to 99 25 OFF auto reception switch over on length of ring 1 to n sec OFF source record G4 add do not add s...

Page 87: ...f characters for file OCR 1 to 24 initial display of transmission scan routine task button one touch button new address source record keep do not keep transmission function setting reset Do you really want to reset yes no set common reception function settings duplex recording ON OFF cassette selection switch A ON OFF switch B ON OFF switch C ON OFF switch D ON OFF image reduction image reduction ...

Page 88: ...x reception function setting ECM reception ON OFF reception mode section fax tel switch auto reception incoming ring ON OFF remote reception ON OFF auto reception switchover ON OFF Mode Description set up register user box select box 0 to 99 register box name 24 characters max ID NO 0 to 99999999 file auto delete 0 no 1 2 3 6 12 hr 1 2 3 7 30 days URL transmissions setup select e mail address rese...

Page 89: ... ID No 0 9999999 file auto delete 0 no 1 2 3 6 12 hr 1 2 3 7 30 days URL transmission setting e mail address selection reset print photo mode ON OFF read setting standard mode register reset set register fax box register box 0 49 register box name 24 characters max ID No 0 9999999 URL transmission setting e mail address selection reset Mode Description settings number of copies 1 to 9999 1 duplex ...

Page 90: ...up staple sort punch disable top bottom left right booklet print disable open to left open to right middle bind enable disable transparency interleaf disable white sheet printed sheet print in sets print in sets enable disable print position 5 locations upper left lower left upper right lower right print start character 1 to 9999 1 print size small at 12 point medium at 24 point large at 36 point ...

Page 91: ... 4800 bps international transmission domestic international transmission 1 international transmission 2 international transmission 3 communication mode G4 to G3 G3 only e mail target registration register name 24 characters register name 24 superscript characters e mail address 128 characters i fax target registration register name 24 characters register name 24 superscript characters select mode ...

Page 92: ...simplified search server to search select from pull down menu LDAP server already registered search condition name 128 characters e mail 128 characters fax 128 characters fine search server to search select from pull down menu LDAP server already registered search conditions name email fax organization organization based including next not including next identical to next not identical to next sta...

Page 93: ...n the surface of the copyboard glass and the back of the copyboard cover at least once a month Cleaning Procedure Using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent wipe the surface of the copyboard glass 1 and the back of the copyboard cover 2 thereafter dry wipe the surfaces with a dry soft cloth F 1 29 F 1 30 1 2 4 2 Inspection 0007 4603 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 ...

Page 94: ...rocedure 1 Turn on the main power switch 2 Push he test button 1 of the leakage breaker with the tip of a ball point pen 2 3 Check to make sure that the breaker switch shifts to the OFF side and the power is cut F 1 31 4 Turn off the main power switch 5 Shift the breaker switch 1 back to the ON position F 1 32 If the breaker switch has stopped between ON and OFF be sure to shift it to OFF first an...

Page 95: ...rmally 1 2 5 2 CDRH Regulations 0007 3175 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2 1976 These regulations apply to laser products manufactured on and after August 1 1976 and the sale of laser products not certified under the regulations is banned within the Unti...

Page 96: ...full care to avoid exposure to laser light do not insert a tool e g screwdriver or those with a high reflectance into the laser path also remove watches rings and the like before starting the work as they reflect laser light The machine s laser light is red in color and an appropriate label 1 2 is attached to all covers that can reflect laser light Keep also in mind that the machine s laser unit c...

Page 97: ...r on Clothing or Skin 1 If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner wipe it off with tissue then wash it off with water 2 Do not use warm water which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth 3 Do not bring toner into contact with plastic material It tends to react easily 1 2 6 Product Specifications 1 2 6 1 Product Specifications 0007 2862 iR2270...

Page 98: ...and Delivery method face down Reproduction ratio 25 to 400 Warm up time iR 2270 iR2870 iR2230 iR2830 30 sec or less iR 3870 iR4570 iR3530 40 sec or less Image margin leading edge 2 5 1 5 mm single sided 2 5 2 0 mm doubles sided Image margin trailing edge B4 or smaller 2 5 1 1 1 7 mm B4 or larger 3 5 0 6 2 8 mm free side 5 5 1 5 45 mm single sided 0 5 mm or more double sided Image margin left right...

Page 99: ...ction keys Toner type magnetic negative toner Original type sheet book Maximum original size 297 x 431 8 mm Original size detection function by reflection type sensor Duplex method without tray Sleep mode yes Option See the system configuration chart Operating environment temperature range 15 to 27 5 deg C Operating environment humidity range 25 to 75 Operating environment atmospheric pressure 0 6...

Page 100: ...7 Wh reference only continuous printing 823 Wh reference only Ozone max 0 02 ppm or less avr 0 01 ppm or less Dimensions 565 mm x 700 mm x 761 4 mm WxDxH Weight body 61 6 kg reader unit 8 7 kg ADF 8 5 kg Paper size Single sided Auto duplexing cassette feed manual feed cassette feed manual feed Plain paper A4 28 22 25 22 7 7 A5R 17 14 17 14 7 7 B5 27 22 25 22 7 7 B5R 17 14 17 14 7 7 A4R 17 14 17 14...

Page 101: ...esents the iR3570 3530 Heavy paper A4 25 A5R 13 B5 23 22 B5R 13 A4R 13 B4 11 A3 12 STMTR 13 LTR 25 22 LTRR 13 LGL 11 LDR 12 Postcard 12 8 free 11 OHP A4 25 22 LTR 25 22 Envelope Monarch 10 6 COM10 10 6 ISO B5 10 6 ISO C5 10 6 DL 10 6 YOGATA No 4 10 6 Paper size Single sided Auto duplexing cassette feed manual feed cassette feed manual feed ...

Page 102: ... 8 10 8 7 8 7 4 B5 35 15 25 8 17 7 12 4 B5R 20 16 7 17 14 4 10 8 3 8 7 2 A4R 20 16 7 17 14 4 10 8 3 8 7 2 B4 24 16 7 13 4 12 8 3 6 2 A3 22 7 14 4 11 3 7 2 STMTR 20 16 15 17 14 8 10 8 7 8 7 4 LTR 45 35 15 25 8 22 7 12 4 LTRR 20 16 7 17 14 4 10 8 3 8 7 2 LGL 16 14 7 13 4 8 7 3 6 2 LDR 22 7 14 4 11 3 7 2 free 13 Heavy paper A4 25 A5R 14 B5 25 B5R 14 A4R 14 B4 12 A3 12 STMTR 14 LTR 25 LTRR 14 LGL 12 L...

Page 103: ...DL 12 9 yogata NO 4 12 8 Type Size Source Manual feed tray Cassette Side Paper Deck Q1 Plain paper eco paper recycled paper A3 B4 A4R LDR LGL LTRR B5 EXE A5R STMTR B5R yes yes no A4 LTR yes yes yes Paper size Single sided Auto duplexing cassette feed manual feed cassette feed manual feed 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry ...

Page 104: ...odified yes no no 4 plane postcard A4 modified yes no no Label paper A4 A4R LTR LTRR yes no no 3 hole paper same as plain yes yes yes Tracing paper A3 B4 A4 yes yes no Envelope Com10 Monarch DL ISO C5ISO B5 yes yes no Type Size Source Manual feed tray Cassette Plain paper eco paper recycled paper A3 B4 A4R LDR LGL LTRR B5 EXE A5R STMTR B5R yes yes A4 LTR yes yes Type Size Source Manual feed tray C...

Page 105: ...s yes Postcard postcard A6R modified double postcard A5R modified yes no 4 plane postcard A4 modified yes no Label paper A4 A4R LTR LTRR yes no 3 hole paper same as plain yes yes Tracing paper A3 B4 A4 yes yes Envelope Com10 Monarch DL ISO C5ISO B5 yes yes Type Size Source Manual feed tray Cassette ...

Page 106: ......

Page 107: ...Chapter 2 Installation ...

Page 108: ......

Page 109: ...rts 2 28 2 2 11 If Not Connected to a Network 2 32 2 3 Checking the Connection to the Network 2 33 2 3 1 Overview 2 33 2 3 2 Using the PING Function 2 33 2 3 3 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address 2 33 2 4 Troubleshooting the Network 2 35 2 4 1 Overview 2 35 2 4 2 Making a Check Using a Loopback Address 2 35 2 4 3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address 2 35 2 5 Checking the Images Operati...

Page 110: ......

Page 111: ...ine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun provide curtains to the window 4 The room must be well ventilated The level of ozone generated by the machine in use will not affect the individuals around it However some may find its odor to be unpleasant as when working in a poorly ventilated room 5 The ...

Page 112: ...ath Unit E1 and Puncher Unit L1 M1 N1 P1 Installed F 2 4 7 The machine must be placed in a well ventilated area It is important to make sure however that the machine is not near the air vent for suction of the room 1 035 mm 100 mm min 1 158 mm 1 087 mm 1 228 mm 1 371 mm 1 553 mm 100 mm min 1 015 mm 182 mm 2 091 mm 107 mm 1 983 mm 1 169 mm 100 mm min ...

Page 113: ...o that the machine is fully used to the site temperature thus avoiding image faults caused by condensation The term condensation refers to the formation of droplets of water on the surface of a metal object brought in from a cold to warm place i e as the result of the rapid cooling of the moisture vapor around the object 2 The machine weighs a maximum of about 80 kg including a DADF Be sure to wor...

Page 114: ...r bottle 230V CA model only 1p c 10 Size label small ADF standard model only 1pc 3 Lower right cover 1p c 11 Shut Down Warning Label 2pc 4 Adjusting screw 2p c 12 Toner Bottle Warning Label 1pc 5 covering rubber 1p c 13 Stamp DADF standard model only 1pc ...

Page 115: ...book case 1p c 14 Power Cable 1pc 7 Reversing Guide iR3570 4570 model only 1p c 15 Ferrite core 1pc 8 Cassette size label 1p c Operators manual Users Guide Operators manual CD ROM MEAP Admin CD ROM Operators manual Reference Guide Operators manual Copying Mail Box Function Guide Operators manual Easy Operation Guide Operators manual CD ROM NW RUI Guide MEAP Admin CD ROM ...

Page 116: ... right 6 Support cover 7 Delivery tray right cover 8 Delivery tray 9 Inside right cover 10 Front cover unit 11 Cassette 1 12 Cassette 2 13 Left cover lower 14 Left cover 15 Inside base cover 16 Left cover rear 17 Delivery tray rear cover lower 18 Delivery tray rear cover 1 3 2 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 5 4 6 7 9 8 15 17 ...

Page 117: ...right 20 Copyboard glass 21 Reader cover rear 22 Face over 23 Rear cover 24 Right cover rear 25 Manual feed pickup tray 26 Right cover lower front 27 Right door unit 28 Delivery cover 29 Right cover upper 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 29 23 28 ...

Page 118: ...le Memo When placing the copier on the cassette pedestal be sure to align the two positioning pins 1 to the holes on the base plate of the copier F 2 9 4 Close the right door of the pedestal in the case of the 2 cassette Pedestal Y2 5 Remove the packaging tapes and materials from each unit Front door Right door Manual feeder unit Cassettes 1 and 2 Inside the cassettes 1 and 2 DADF In the case of t...

Page 119: ...on of the arrow F 2 12 If you turn on the machine without detaching the fixing assembly release cover the fixing heater can suffer damage 10 Close the right door 2 2 2 Installing the Toner Bottle 0007 4955 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the front cover 1 F 2 13 2 Lift the lock lever 1 F 2 14 3 Unpack the toner bottle and remove the cap 1 F 2 15 4 Mount the toner bottle 1 on the copier ...

Page 120: ... horizontal otherwise no supply of toner will be made 2 2 3 Installing the Drum Unit 0006 6766 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the front cover unit 2 as sliding it to the left F 2 18 2 Remove the waste toner box 1 F 2 19 3 Open the right door 1 F 2 20 4 Remove the lock screw 1 of the developing assembly pressure lever ...

Page 121: ... 23 F 2 24 7 Remove the package of the drum unit which is provided with the product and remove the two drum pressure release blocks 1 F 2 25 Do not touch the photosensitive drum surface Do not expose the photosensitive drum surface to light for a long period of time Do not touch the rowel of the drum 8 Mount the drum unit 1 which is provided with the product to the copier ...

Page 122: ...which the dummy drum has been secured F 2 28 10 Push down the developing assembly pressure lever 1 and apply pressure F 2 29 11 Secure the developing assembly pressure lever with the one screw 1 F 2 30 12 Close the right door 13 Mount the waste toner box 1 F 2 31 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle ...

Page 123: ...nit 3 with the two screws 2 and mount the covering rubber 1 which is provided with the product F 2 33 Reference Mounting the Front Cover 1 Fit the 2 claws 2 of the front cover unit 1 into the claw holes 3 of the machine F 2 34 2 While matching the top 4 of the front cover unit against the machine fit the lower left claw 2 of the front cover unit 1 in the claw hole 3 of the machine F 2 35 3 While m...

Page 124: ...cassettes 1 and 2 and tighten the adjusting screws 1 at the base plate temporarily until the screw legs touch the bottom slightly F 2 38 2 Check if the machine wobbles while it is lying on the desk or the floor and tighten the adjusting screws if necessary When it wobbles in the direction shown by the arrow A tighten the screw at the right side in the above picture When it wobbles in the direction...

Page 125: ...trol panel power switch for 3 sec or more 2 Go through the instructions for the shut down sequence shown on the display so that the main power switch may be turned off 3 Turn off the main power switch 2 2 6 Stirring Toner 0007 5062 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Enter the Service Mode Press first and 2 and 8 at the same time and then 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL TONER S 3 Press the OK key Toner...

Page 126: ...in reference to the installation procedure of the cassette pedestal 2 2 8 APVC Correction of the Drum 0007 5071 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Enter the Service Mode Press first and 2 and 8 at the same time and then 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION DPC D GAMMA 3 Press the OK key Paper is fed from the cassette 1 regardless of size of paper in the cassette If there is no paper in the cassette 1 paper is fed ...

Page 127: ...ase of a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 open its right door 1 3 Open the lower right cover 2 and remove the 2 screws to detach the cover lower right front F 2 45 4 Take out the cassettes 1 and 2 5 Check the position of the index 1 on the adjusting plate F 2 46 Adjusting the Cassette 1 6 Remove the 2 claws 2 and detach the grip right front 1 in the direction of the arrow F 2 47 7 Loosen the fixing screw 2 ...

Page 128: ...he left margin L1 of the image F 2 50 F 2 51 1 Paper feed direction 8 Tighten the fixing screw 9 Fit the cassette 2 back in 10 Make a copy and check to see that the left margin of the image on paper picked up from the cassette 2 is 2 5 1 5 mm 11 Attach the right front cover of the machine If the left margin on paper picked up from the manual feeder is not as indicated make the following adjustment...

Page 129: ...er feed direction 3 If not as indicated change the small paper 2nd side horizontal registration setting small paper service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REF An increase of 1 will increase the left margin of the image by 0 1 mm 4 Enter the new value obtained as the result of the foregoing adjustment as the large paper 2nd side horizontal registration setting Large paper service mode COPIER ADJUS...

Page 130: ...ch the holder to the bottom plate of the pedestal F 2 57 Locations where the service book folder cannot be attached Inside the machine Inner side of the front cover Locations where the louver is blocked Locations where the grips are blocked Memo Attach the service book holder to the left cover of the machine if the pedestal is not installed Lower right cover 1 Attach the lower right cover 1 Perfor...

Page 131: ...sible The harness must be wound around the ferrite core once before the core is fixed in place The harness is not trapped by the ferrite core F 2 62 When installing the machine newly or when replacing the harness be sure not to leave behind the ferrite core Reversing Guide iR3570 4570 model only 1 Fit the reversing guide 1 F 2 63 2 2 11 If Not Connected to a Network 0007 6496 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 ...

Page 132: ...system setup network Ethernet driver setup auto detect ...

Page 133: ...e mode COPIER TEST NETWORK PING 2 Enter the correct IP address using the control panel keypad and press the OK key 3 Press the Start key If successful the indication will be OK If the attempt fails however NG will be indicated F 2 64 1 Result OK NG 2 IP address input 2 3 3 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address 0007 5603 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 You can use a remote host address in combinat...

Page 134: ...ppropriate remote host address 3 Enter the remote host address for PING 4 If the result is OK the connection to the network is correct 5 If the result is NG the connection to the network is not correct start the following troubleshooting work ...

Page 135: ...e loopback address 127 0 0 1 for PING If NG check the machine s TCP IP setting once again and execute PING once again If OK go to the next check 2 4 3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address 0007 5614 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 A local host address is the IP address of the machine When you execute PING using the address it will return after it has reached the network controller so that you will...

Page 136: ...ny copies as specified are made normally 2 Make settings e g date time to suit the needs of the user 3 Start service mode press the User Mode key press the 2 and 8 keys at the same time press the User Mode key once again 4 Make specifications related settings to suit the needs of the user COPIER OPTION USER 5 Make test prints by making the following selections in service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC ...

Page 137: ...70 iR2870 The card reader must be used in combination with the Card Reader Mounting Kit B1 2 6 2 Checking the Contents 0007 2707 iR2270 iR2870 Card Reader C1 T 2 4 F 2 66 Card Reader Mounting Kit B1 1 Card Reader C1 1 pc 2 RS tightening screw M4x10 1 pc 3 Toothed washer 1 pc C 1 2 3 ...

Page 138: ...ed upon insertion Be sure to go through the following steps on the host machine before starting the work 1 Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more 2 Go through the shutdown sequence as instructed on the screen so that you may turn off the main power switch 3 Turn off the main power switch 4 Disconnect the power cable from the wall outlet 1 Card reader base 1 pc 2 Relay harness 1...

Page 139: ...ght door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right cover 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 2 69 4 Remove the face plate 2 from the right cover rear 1 using nippers 4 3 2 1 ON OFF 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 140: ...or of the host machine F 2 71 6 Mount the rear right cover using 4 screws 7 Mount the card reader 1 and the card reader base 2 using the included TP screw M4x8 4 Be sure to use the washer 3 when doing so F 2 72 8 Route the relay cable 2 through the wire saddle 1 1 2 ...

Page 141: ... will not be trapped mount the card reader 1 using a TP screw 4x25 3 fitted with a washer 2 F 2 75 11 Connect the power cable to the wall outlet and turn on the main power switch See that the machine is in a standby state and start service mode 12 Make the following selections in the machine s service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD then 1 2 ...

Page 142: ...control then see that the following numbers are available ID00000001 to ID00001000 If you entered 1 in service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD 2 Make the following selections in user mode system setup network setup TCP IP setup IP address Set the following IP address gateway address subnet mask Unless you have set system control group ID and system control ID No you will not be able to execute r...

Page 143: ...achine has properly been installed before starting the work 3 be sure to disconnect the power plug of the host machine before starting the work 4 be sure to identify the screws by type length diameter and location 5 be sure the settings data are ready on the PC at the service station 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the top cover 1 and detach the cover F 2 76 2 Connect the connector 1 of the power suppl...

Page 144: ...nded for an NE controller F 2 79 5 Secure the controller 1 to the host machine s rear cover using 4 screws 2 F 2 80 6 Take up the slack from the cable connecting the host machine and the controller bundle the excess length on the controller side and fix it in place using a harness guide 1 ...

Page 145: ...he controller will be IPC F 2 82 8 If IC6 1 is found on the PCB shift bit 7 of the DIP swish 2 SW2 7 to ON otherwise shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 SW2 7 to OFF F 2 83 1 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 1 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 2 1 ...

Page 146: ...ansmission level to 16 dBm ON OFF sets the modem signal transmission level to 14 dBm SW3 1 see right OFF ON sets the modem signal transmission level to 12 dBm SW3 2 ON ON sets the modem signal transmission level to 10 dBm SW3 3 OFF keep at OFF at all times SW3 4 ON selects push pulse for controller line setting OFF selects dial pulse for controller line setting SW3 5 ON selects 20PPS for dial puls...

Page 147: ... Set the bits of the DIP switch 1 SW 2 on the PC as indicated in the table then press the push switch 2 A press on the push switch 2 SW4 will causes LED5 3 red to go on T 2 7 bits of SW2 Setting SW2 1 OFF SW2 2 OFF SW2 3 ON SW2 4 ON SW2 5 OFF SW2 6 OFF SW2 7 See step 9 SW2 8 OFF LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 1 ...

Page 148: ...n press the push switch 2 SW4 A press on the push switch 2 SW4 will cause LED5 3 red to go off indicating that the RAM has been initialized T 2 8 bits of SW2 Setting SW2 1 OFF SW2 2 OFF SW2 3 OFF SW2 4 ON SW2 5 OFF SW2 6 ON SW2 7 See step 9 SW 8 OFF LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 1 2 3 ...

Page 149: ...o the connector 1 LINE of the controller If you are using the extension function connect the existing telephone or fax to the connector 2 TEL and connect the telephone line to the connector 1 LINE of the controller LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 1 2 3 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5...

Page 150: ...ind out if the controller is capable of placing a telephone call to the PC in the service station Press the push switch 1 SW4 on the PCB A press on the push switch 1 SW4 will cause LED6 2 red to go on when the transmission is done LED6 2 red will go off If it has failed LED6 2 red will start to flash A press on the push switch 1 SW4 while LED6 2 is flashing will start transmission once again A pre...

Page 151: ...tings label 1 on the top cover of the controller and record the settings of the switches 21 Secure the top cover 2 of the controller in place using 2 screws 3 When doing so check to be sure that the cable of the power supply unit is held in place by the cable guide inside the controller and is not trapped by the top cover 2 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 ...

Page 152: ...F 2 94 3 2 3 1 ...

Page 153: ...Chapter 3 Basic Operation ...

Page 154: ......

Page 155: ...Contents Contents 3 1 Construction 3 1 3 1 1 Functional Construction 3 1 3 1 2 Major PCB Wiring diagram 3 2 3 2 Basic Sequence 3 5 3 2 1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power On 3 5 ...

Page 156: ......

Page 157: ...nter control system laser exposure system image formation system pickup feed system fixing delivery system For detailed discussions of the individual blocks see the chapters that follow F 3 1 T 3 1 A General Control System 1 HDD main controller PCB 2 accessories PCB B Original Exposure System 3 photosensitive drum C reader Control System 4 charging reader controller PCB 5 developing A MN CON D DC ...

Page 158: ...s a wiring diagram showing the relationship among major PCBs D Printer Control System 6 transfer DC controller PCB 7 fixing E Laser Exposure System 8 delivery reversal duplex assembly F Image Formation System 9 pickup control G Fixing Delivery System 10 cassette 1 H Pickup Feed System 11 cassette 2 ...

Page 159: ...roller PCB 13 Laser drive PCB 6 DC controller PCB 14 Cassette size relay PCB 7 High voltage PCB 15 Upper cassette size PCB J502 J1113 J511 J1018A J1018B J211 J219 J218 J216 J217 J212 J404 J1021 J203 J640 J210 J3130 J1303 J1302 J254 J250 J1020 J1027 J603 J3129 J831 J3128 J1110 J1111 J6801 J6802 J301 J315 J310 J321 J311 J307A J318 J316 J501 J1301 J647 J832 1 2 3 4 5 11 9 10 8 14 15 16 7 6 12 13 J601...

Page 160: ...Chapter 3 3 4 Memo The arrows in the diagram indicate the wring between PCBs and do not indicate the direction of individual signals 8 AC drive PCB 16 Lower cassette size PCB ...

Page 161: ... position the lifter is moved up until the top of the stack of sheets is detected reverse forward Shading correction Main power switch ON SREADY STBY Reader motor M501 LED CIS HP sensor PS503 LED intensity adjustment when lit in each color CIS output gain adjustment when lit in all colors Shading position CIS output offset correction Shading position Shading position CIS output offset correction ...

Page 162: ......

Page 163: ...Chapter 4 Main Controller ...

Page 164: ......

Page 165: ...4 21 4 5 7 Printer unit Output Image Processing 4 21 4 6 Flow of Image Data 4 23 4 6 1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions 4 23 4 6 2 Flow of Image Data for the Copy Function 4 23 4 6 3 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function 4 24 4 6 4 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function 4 25 4 6 5 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function 4 25 4 6 6 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function 4 26 4 6...

Page 166: ...emoving the Boot ROM 4 37 4 7 4 HDD 4 38 4 7 4 1 Removing the Face Cover 4 38 4 7 4 2 Removing the Face Cover optional 4 38 4 7 4 3 Removing the Counter PCB 4 39 4 7 4 4 Removing the Counter PCB optional 4 40 4 7 4 5 Removing the HDD 4 40 4 7 4 6 Removing the HDD optional 4 41 ...

Page 167: ...ory printer unit output image processing printer unit image input processing rendering color LCD controller card printer unit interface fax image processing etc SRAM Retains service mode settings by SRAM HDD management information Image memory SDRAM Temporarily retains image data 256 MB 512 MB max BOOTROM Stores boot program HDD Stores system software retains image data for Box Fax function 20 GB ...

Page 168: ...age processing control reader image input processing rendering processing controls color LCD controller card reader interface controls fax image processing SRAM retains service mode settings and HDD management information SRAM Image memory SDRAM temporarily retains image data 128 MB 256 MB max BOOTROM stores boot program Main controller PCB USB port Riser board Boot ROM SRAM Ethernet 10 100BASE T ...

Page 169: ...ta for Box Fax functions 20 GB USB port USB2 0 interface Ethernet port 10 100 Base T Ethernet interface Item Description Main controller PCB Image memory SDRAM USB port Boot ROM SRAM Ethernet 10 100BASE T Hard disk drive optional DC controller PCB Reader Unit ...

Page 170: ...oller according to connectors F 4 3 T 4 3 Connector Description J1003 SDRAM connection slot J1004 SDRAM connection slot J1005 Fax connector 2 port J1010 Boot ROM connector slot J1020 J1021 J1059 J1022 IC1001 IC1009 IC1008 IC1084 IC1004 IC1003 IC1100 IC1006 IC1005 IC1010 J1018 J1016 J1004 J1003 IC1002 BATTERY J1060 J1026 J1023 J1062 J1006 J1024 J1029 J1028 J1014 J1030 J1010 J1013 J1061 J1017 J1005 ...

Page 171: ...following functions shown according to connectors J1013 Riser board connection slot J1014 Scanner DDI J1017 USB port J1018 Control panel connector J1020 Power supply connector J1026 Hard disk connector J1029 Printer DDI J1030 Fax connector 1 port J1061 Ethernet port 10 100BaseT Connector Description ...

Page 172: ... board connection slot J1014 scanner DDI J1017 USB port J1018 control panel connector J1020 power supply connector J1026 hard disk connector J1020 J1021 J1059 J1022 IC1001 IC1009 IC1008 IC1084 IC1004 IC1003 IC1100 IC1006 IC1005 IC1010 J1018 J1016 J1004 J1003 IC1002 BATTERY J1060 J1026 J1023 J1062 J1006 J1024 J1029 J1028 J1014 J1030 J1010 J1013 J1061 J1017 J1005 J1027 ...

Page 173: ...e data TMP_GEN Stores temporary files log data TMP_PSS PDL spool TMP_FAX Ensures fax reception APL_SEND Stores user data address book transfer settings APL_MEAP Stores MEAP applications APL_GEN Mode memory data standard mode data History e g print job history iFax image data Fax image data Other IMG_MNG Stores file management table profile PDL_DEV Stores PDL font etc BOOTDEV Stores execution modul...

Page 174: ...tions HDD BOOTDEV RUI Remote user interface module HDD BOOTDEV Boot Starts up the machine BootROM DIMM FAX board G3FAX Controls G3 Fax HDD BOOTDEV 1 line Dcon Controls the DC controller DC controller PCB Mask ROM soldered Rcon Controls the printer unit controller Printer unit controller PCB Flash ROM soldered Meapcont Controls MEAP applications HDD BOOTDEV HDD TMP_GEN TMP_PSS FSTDEV APL_SEND APL_M...

Page 175: ...ctions T 4 7 Partition Description FSTDEV Collects compressed image data TMP_GEN Stores temporary files log data TMP_PSS PDL spool TMP_FAX Ensures fax reception APL_SEND Stores user data address book transfer settings Main controller PCB DC controller PCB HDD Reader unit BOOTDEV BOOTDEV SYSTEM Language RUI MEAP G3FAX DCON RCON BOOT ...

Page 176: ...gement table profile PDL_DEV Stores PDL font etc BOOTDEV Stores execution module message data file RUI content etc FSTCDEV Chasing not used System software Description Location Remarks System System module controls mechanism as a whole HDD BOOTDEV Language Language module controls LCD indications HDD BOOTDEV RUI Remote user interface module HDD BOOTDEV Partition Description HDD TMP_GEN TMP_PSS FST...

Page 177: ...C controller PCB Mask ROM soldered Rcon Controls the printer unit controller Printer unit controller PCB Flash ROM soldered Meapcont Controls MEAP applications HDD BOOTDEV System software Description Location Remarks Main controller PCB DC controller PCB HDD Reader unit BOOTDEV BOOTDEV SYSTEM Language RUI MEAP G3FAX DCON RCON BOOT ...

Page 178: ... the image memory DRAM the control panel shows the following screen using a progress bar to indicate the progress of the start up sequence F 4 9 Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated as access is being made to the HDD Turning off the power can cause a fault on the HDD identified by E602 4 3 2 Start Up Sequence 0006 6703 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Boot ROM Area Self Di...

Page 179: ...the system software from the HDD to write it into the image memory SDRAM Image Memory SDRAM Area interval 3 The system software written by the boot program initializes the various functional blocks e g I F settings of the main controller When all the foregoing ends normally the machine becomes ready to accept a job i e the control panel shows the Operation screen and the LED on the Start key chang...

Page 180: ...ng execution access for checking Main controller PCB While the Self Diagnosis Program Is Being Executed Image memory SDRAM CPU HDD System area Image data area BootROM Main controller PCB Self diagnosis program Boot program access to the program during execution flow of the system program While the Boot Program Is Being Run System software ...

Page 181: ...e is provided with a shut down sequence 4 4 3 Flow of Operation 0006 8379 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The following diagram shows the flow of shut down operation F 4 13 4 4 4 Flow of Operation w HDD 0008 8065 iR3530 The following diagram shows the flow of shut down operation Press on the control panel power switch 3 sec or more HDD protection check mode HDD protection execution mode Main power swi...

Page 182: ...rotection execution mode Main power switch off Indicates the job being executed and informs the user that it will start the shut down sequence Moves to the shut down sequence Cancels any job on wait in print mode Cancels any job on wait in print mode Cancels any job being executed in fax mode ...

Page 183: ...s functions F 4 15 4 5 2 Construction of the Image Processing Module 0006 6706 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The machine s major image processing is executed by the main controller PCB The following shows the construction of the modules associated with image processing SEND FAX PullScan E Mail PDL Print BOX PC Original Copy A A A Print output Scan Image data Other iR machine ...

Page 184: ...g shows the construction of modules associated with image processing Reader unit SDRAM Reader unit controller PCB HDD Main controller PCB image memory program temporary storage DC controller PCB Processes the image data read by the reader unit Reader unit input image processing block Processes image data for output to the printer unit Printer unit output image processing block ...

Page 185: ... processed by the main controller PCB Reader unit SDRAM Reader unit controller PCB HDD Main controller PCB image memory program temporary storage DC controller PCB Processes the image data read by the reader unit Reader unit input image processing block Processes image data for output to the printer unit Printer unit output image processing block optional ...

Page 186: ...ession extension and editing Film photo mode Binary processing screen processing Binary processing error diffusion To compression expansion editing block Edge emphasis Enlargement reduction Text mode Text photo film photo mode intensify to density conversion density adjustment F adjustment gamma correction Main controller PCB Reader unit ...

Page 187: ...R3570 iR4570 Main controller PCB to printer unit output image processing block Enlargement reduction Rotation Integration Compression Expansion Printer unit image processing block PDPDL image processing block SDRAM HDD Main controller PCB to printer unit output image processing block Enlargement reduction Rotation Integration Compression Expansion Reader image processing block PDL image processing...

Page 188: ...a coming from the printer unit for output to the printer unit F 4 21 Main controller PCB To DC controller PCB For PDL data when fine line processing is ON Compression expansion editing block Binary density conversion Enlargement reduction Smoothing Thickening ...

Page 189: ...ata when the Copy Function is in use F 4 22 4 6 2 Flow of Image Data for the Copy Function 0009 1743 iR3530 The following shows the flow of image data when the copy function is in use Image processing block for printer unit Image processing block for printer unit Printer unit Main control PCB Data compression Data rotation Data expansion SDRAM HDD DC controller PCB ...

Page 190: ...ge data when the Box function is in use F 4 24 Printer image processing block Reader image processing block Reader unit Main control PCB Data compression Data rotation Data expansion SDRAM HDD DC controller PCB raw data option Image processing block for printer unit Printer unit Main controller PCB Data compression Data rotation SDRAM HDD ...

Page 191: ...e data when the BOX function is in use F 4 25 4 6 5 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function 0006 6749 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The following is the flow of image data when the SEND function is in use Reader image processing block Reader unit Main controller PCB Data compression Data rotation SDRAM HDD optional ...

Page 192: ...on 0009 1745 iR3530 The following is the flow of image data when the SEND function is in use Image processing block for printer unit Printer unit Main controller PCB Data rotation Data expansion Resolution conversion SDRAM HDD To network compression data Ethernet port ...

Page 193: ...R2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The following is the flow of image data when the fax transmission function is in use Reader image processing block Reader unit Main controller PCB Data rotation Data expansion Resolution conversion SDRAM HDD To network compression data Ethernet port optional ...

Page 194: ... 1746 iR3530 The following shows the flow of image data when the fax transmission function is in use Image processing block for reader unit Image processing block for fax Super G3 Fax Board Resolution conversion Main controller PCB Compression Compression Expansion SDRAM HDD Reader unit ...

Page 195: ...on 0006 6751 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The following is the flow of image data when the fax reception function is in use Fax image processing block Reader image processing block Reader unit Main control PCB Rotation Compression Expansion SDRAM HDD optional Super G3 fax board ...

Page 196: ...09 1747 iR3530 The following shows the flow of image data when the fax reception function is in use Image processing block for printer unit Image processing block for fax Super G3 Fax Board Main controller PCB Data compression Data rotation Data expansion SDRAM HDD DC controller PCB ...

Page 197: ...Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function 0006 6752 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The following is the flow of image data when the PDL function is in use Fax image processing block Sure G3 fax board SDRAM HDD optional DC controller PCB ...

Page 198: ...function is in use F 4 33 Rendering processing block Compression expansion editing block Processing block for printer unit DC controller PCB Main controller PCB SDRAM HDD Ethernet PDL Rendering processing block Compression expansion edit block Printer image processing block DC controller PCB Main controller PCB SDRAM HDD optional Ethernet PDL ...

Page 199: ...rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 4 34 4 7 1 2 Removing the Main Controller PCB 0007 6417 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 4 35 Freeing the Flexible Cable To free the flexible cable 1 shift up the lock first as shown F 4 36 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 and detach the main controller PCB 2 1 1 1 1 1...

Page 200: ...controller PCB 1 Boot ROM 2 Hard disk 3 SDRAM 4 FRAM F 4 38 4 7 2 SDRAM 4 7 2 1 Removing the Face Cover 0007 6411 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 2 Loosen the 2 screws 2 F 4 39 3 Pull off the face cover 1 in upward direction F 4 40 4 7 2 2 Removing the SDRAM 0007 6412 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Release the 2 locking levers 1 and detach the SDRAM 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 201: ... the 2 screws 2 F 4 42 3 Pull off the face cover 1 in upward direction F 4 43 4 7 3 2 Removing the Boot ROM 0007 6414 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Push the locking lever 1 and detach the boot ROM 2 F 4 44 4 7 4 HDD 4 7 4 1 Removing the Face Cover 0007 6409 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 2 Loosen the 2 screws 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 202: ...ing the Face Cover optional 0009 2005 iR3530 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 2 Loosen the 2 screws 2 F 4 47 3 Pull off the face cover 1 in upward direction F 4 48 4 7 4 3 Removing the Counter PCB 0008 2478 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the counter PCB 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 203: ...etach the counter PCB 2 F 4 50 4 7 4 5 Removing the HDD 0007 6410 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the HDD 2 in the direction of the arrow F 4 51 4 7 4 6 Removing the HDD optional 0009 2007 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the HDD 2 in the direction of the arrow F 4 52 ...

Page 204: ......

Page 205: ...Chapter 5 Original Exposure System ...

Page 206: ......

Page 207: ...g Direction 5 14 5 3 4 Detecting the Size of Originals 5 16 5 3 4 1 Outline 5 16 5 3 4 2 Outline of Size Identification 5 17 5 3 5 Dirt Sensor Control 5 19 5 3 5 1 Outline 5 19 5 3 6 Image Processing 5 22 5 3 6 1 Outline 5 22 5 3 6 2 CCD Drive 5 23 5 3 6 3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output 5 23 5 3 6 4 A D Conversion of the CCD Output 5 24 5 3 6 5 Shading Correction outline 5...

Page 208: ...ar Cover 5 45 5 4 5 2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor front rear 5 46 5 4 6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor 5 47 5 4 6 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 5 47 5 4 6 2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass 5 48 5 4 6 3 Removing the Contract Sensor Home Position Sensor 5 49 5 4 7 Original Size Sensor 5 50 5 4 7 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 5 50 5 4 7 2 Removing the Copyboard Glass 5 51 5 4 7 3 Rem...

Page 209: ... contact image sensor CIS fixed in position Read resolution 600 main scanning x 600 sub scanning dpi Gradation 256 Scanning speed in ADF mode 45 ipm single sided A4 LTR Carriage position detection by contact image sensor CIS HP sensor PS503 Magnification 25 to 400 Main Scanning Direction by main controller PCB image processing Sub Scanning Direction in book mode by changing carriage travel speed b...

Page 210: ...maximum original read width 304 mm CIS drive control by reader motor M501 Original size identification 1 Book Mode in main scanning direction by reflection type sensor AB Inch in sub scanning direction by reflection type sensor AB Inch 2 ADF Mode width by original width value in ADF length by photo sensor in ADF The particulars of control differ depending on the selected magnification For details ...

Page 211: ...ocessing 3 Original sensor 3 PS506 helps identify original size for all destinations 4 Original sensor 4 PS507 helps identify original size AB Inch AB 5 Original sensor 5 PS508 helps identify original size Inch A 6 Reader motor M501 pulse motor controls the drive of the carriage 7 Reader heater prevents condensation on the copyboard glass 8 Original sensor 1 PS504 helps identify original size AB I...

Page 212: ...ion to ADF 5 Reader controller PCB 6 Reader motor drive control 10 Contact image sensor CIS uses LEDs for indirect exposure LED photoconducting body 11 CIS HP sensor PS503 photo interrupter detects CIS home position 12 Cupboard cover open closed sensor PS502 ends original size identification with the copyboard cover at 5 deg Optional 100 230 V model only Item Notation Description J 5 0 0 J 5 0 1 J...

Page 213: ...0 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The machine s reader controller PCB has the following functional construction F 5 3 T 5 3 Jack No Description J500 supplies power to the ADF J501 receives power from the machine body printer unit J502 communication with the machine body printer unit J503 communication with the ADF DC24V DC13V J500 J501 J503 J502 J504 J510 J508 J505 J506 J512 IC520 IC518 IC519 IC529 IC530 IC5...

Page 214: ...rd cover open closed sensor connects to the CIS HP sensor J507 connects to original sensor 1 original sensor 2 J508 connects to original sensor 3 original sensor 4 J510 connects to the contact image sensor CIS J512 for use at factory J513 for use at factory Jack No Description ...

Page 215: ...R3570 iR4570 iR3530 reverse forward Shading correction Main power switch ON SREADY STBY Reader motor M501 LED CIS HP sensor PS503 LED intensity adjustment when lit in each color CIS output gain adjustment when lit in all colors Shading position CIS output offset correction Shading position Shading position CIS output offset correction Shading position Original leading edge 1 CIS position check 2 S...

Page 216: ...g correction Copy board read start position Only if 1 sec or more has passed since previous rotation Shading position Shading position Shading position Original trailing edge Copyboard glass read start position 1 CIS position check 2 After shading correction move to start position 4 Move to standby point 3 Original scan 1 Only if 1 min or more has passed since previous rotation 1 Shading position ...

Page 217: ...n Original trailing edge SREADY Shading position Shading position Shading position Shading position Only if 1 min or more passed since previous rotation Shading position Stream reading start position 2 Original scan 1 CIS position check 1 1 1 Only if 1 min or more has passed since previous rotation CIS HP sensor HP Original glass read start position ...

Page 218: ...P Sensor PS503 Detection Signal checks if the contact image sensor CIS is at home position 3 Copyboard Cover Sensor front PS502 rear PS501 Detection Signal detects the state open close of the copyboard cover 5 3 1 2 Controlling the Reader Motor 0006 5723 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 2 3 forward reverse Sensor light blocking plate Cartridge CIS HP sensor PS503 Reader motor Contact image sen...

Page 219: ...verse Movement After Scanning an Image After scanning an image the machine moves the contact image sensor CIS to shading position at a specific speed 147 mm sec Reader controller PCB 3 3V 24V OPT_MCK CCW MD_POW M_ENABLE RETURN M_VREF 5V J505 B B A A CPU Motor driver 1 2 3 4 M501 Start position Acceleration Original leading edge Normal speed Original trailing edge Deceleration Stop Shift speed Shif...

Page 220: ...d an image and the image is read on a line by line basis T 5 4 Item Description LED serves as the source of light used to expose the original Light guide directs the light from LEDs to the entire length of a single image line of the original Rod lens array collects light reflected by the original CCD array collects the reflected light coming through the rod lens array ...

Page 221: ...the light is then collected by the CCD array the light is converted into an electric signal by the CCD array photo conversion for output The CCD array consists of a total of 8 channels units Each channel possesses its own output correction table used to process an input intensity signal for gain correction for output of an image signal Light guide Light guide LED CCD LED Rod lens array Light guide...

Page 222: ...CCD LUT for CCD gain correction COPIER FUNCTION CCD LUT ADJ2 using the D 10 Chart 5 3 3 Enlargement Reduction 5 3 3 1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction 0006 5724 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 In Book Mode ADF Mode The image is read at 100 in main scanning direction and the magnification is varied by processing the data on the main controller PCB 5 3 3 2 Varying the Magnifi...

Page 223: ...ocessed by the reader controller PCB main controller PCB EX for reduction to 25 the original is read at 236 mm sec and the data is processed for 50 reduction skipping for 1 2 by the reader controller PCB and for 50 skipping for 1 2 by the main controller PCB EX for enlargement to 400 the original is read at a speed of 118 mm sec and the data is processed for 200 enlargement doubling by the main co...

Page 224: ...ction type sensors when the copyboard cover is closed opened the machine identifies the presence of paper if it does not find a change in the output of the reflection type sensors when the copyboard cover is closed opened The machine uses the following sensors and the sensors are arranged as shown in the following figure for main scanning direction reflection type photosensors AB configuration 2 l...

Page 225: ... 11 17 LGL B5R Index plate Original sensor 3 Index plate B4 A3 AB Configuration Inch Configuration Original sensor 5 Butting position Butting position Main scanning direction Main scanning direction Sub scanning direction Sub scanning direction Original sensor 1 Original sensor 2 Original sensor 4 Original sensor 3 Original sensor 1 Reader unit Copyboard over Original sensor 3 Copyboard glass Orig...

Page 226: ...nd the difference between these 2 sets of data is checked If any of the following is true the output of the sensors may not show any change preventing the machine from correctly identifying the size the original is an A3 black original the original is a book its thickness may not allow the copyboard cover to close fully thus preventing the detection of a change in the sensor level the copyboard co...

Page 227: ...t only when the ADF is in use and in addition is closed Timing of Control at the end of a job between sheets for each reading of a sheet at the start of a job only when any of the following conditions is true 1st job after power on dust detected at all points of detection at the end of the previous job dust detection failed to end normally at the end of the previous job e g ADF opened Original sen...

Page 228: ...sition for the next job For control at the end of a job if an original is placed in the ADF with dust detected at all points A B C the machine will indicate a message on its control panel to prompt cleaning of the glass surface The Start key will remain invalid until this message is cleared At the Start of a Job dust bypass Presence of dust is detected at points A B and C in this order in the same...

Page 229: ... T 5 7 F 5 24 Service Mode COPIER OPTION BODY DFDST L1 level 1 used to adjust the dust detection level between sheets COPIER OPTION BODY DFDST L2 level 1 used to adjust the dust detection level at the end of a job Point Discription A read reference position B about 0 5 mm from the reference position to the inner side of the roller C about 1 0 mm from the reference position to the inner side of the...

Page 230: ...Analog Image Processing CCD drive CCD output gain correction offset correction CCD output A D conversion 2 Digital Image Processing shading correction CCD number of lines 1 Number of pixels Total 7488 Number of effective pixels 7180 size of pixel 32 x 46 9 ym Shading correction shading correction executed for each job shading adjustment executed at power on Reader controller PCB CCD drive analog i...

Page 231: ... iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The analog video signal generated by the CCD is corrected so that it will have a specific level gain correction moreover the output voltage occurring in the absence of incident light is also corrected so that it will have a specific CCD 1 line Analog image signal Analog image processing gain correction offset correction A D conversion CCD drive control CCD contr...

Page 232: ...g adjustment executed at power on or shading correction executed for each job 5 3 6 6 Shading Adjustment 0006 5937 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 In this adjustment the machine measures the density of the standard while plate and stores the results in memory as density data It then performs computations on the shading data and uses the result as the target value for shading correction 5 3 6 7 ...

Page 233: ...F 5 28 CCD output Original density Standard white plate Characteristics before correction Target value Measurement Characteristics after correction White ...

Page 234: ... glass 3 F 5 29 When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the following glass surface standard white plate The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 5 30 5 4 1 2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass 0006 9730 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the copyboard glass or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screw...

Page 235: ...4570 iR3530 If an ADF is used be sure to execute P PRINT of service mode to obtain its printout COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 5 4 2 2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0007 0742 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the ADF communications cable 1 if equipped with an ADF F 5 32 2 Open the copyboard cover or the ADF 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the reader rear cover 2 F 5 33 5 4 2 3 Re...

Page 236: ...moving the Copyboard Glass 0007 3420 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the copyboard cover or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 36 When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the following glass surface standard white plate The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it wi...

Page 237: ...r PCB 0007 0745 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the cover 1 F 5 38 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the flexible cable 2 F 5 39 3 Remove the 8 screws 2 and detach the cover 3 F 5 40 4 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and detach the 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 238: ...the connector 2 F 5 42 6 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 5 43 7 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the cover 2 F 5 44 8 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and free the cable from the wire saddle 2 F 5 45 9 Remove the 2 screws 1 and pull out the reader controller PCB base 2 F 5 46 10 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the reader controller PCB 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 239: ...xed reading COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y a 3 shading position adjustment fixed reading COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ S a 4 main sub scanning direction MTF value COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF MG If the value of the following was not 0 before the replacement of the reader controller PCB COPIER OPTION BODY CCD LUT Set a value other than 0 once again and make the following adjustments using the D 10 Chart COPIER FUN...

Page 240: ...3 Scanner Motor 5 4 3 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0007 3432 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the ADF communications cable 1 if equipped with an ADF F 5 49 2 Open the copyboard cover or the ADF 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the reader rear cover 2 F 5 50 5 4 3 2 Removing the Scanner Motor 0006 9746 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then disconnect t...

Page 241: ...ve the 2 screws 1 and detach the copyboard glass retainer right 2 F 5 53 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the copyboard glass retainer left 2 F 5 54 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the reader front cover 2 F 5 55 5 4 4 2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0007 3433 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the ADF communications cable 1 if equipped with an ADF ...

Page 242: ...0 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the copyboard cover or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 58 When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the following glass surface standard white plate The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 243: ...e direction of the arrow so that the contact image sensor CIS 2 will move where it is shown in the figure F 5 60 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the plate 2 F 5 61 3 Remove the flexible cable 1 and detach the contact image sensor CIS 2 F 5 62 When detaching the contact sensor unit take care not to touch the light guide assembly and the lens 1 2 ...

Page 244: ...de item COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF MG main scanning direction MTR correction value F 5 65 Be sure also to update the value indicated on the service label found behind the left cover of the reader unit so that it is identical to the value indicated on the CIS label Reference At time of shipment from the factory no CIS label is attached 5 4 5 Copyboard Cover Open Close Sensor 5 4 5 1 Removing the Reader ...

Page 245: ...70 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the sensor base 3 F 5 68 2 Detach the 2 sensors 1 from the sensor base え F 5 69 5 4 6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor 5 4 6 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0007 3439 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the copyboard cover or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard ...

Page 246: ...ence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 5 71 5 4 6 2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass 0007 3426 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the copyboard glass or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 3 Remove the ADF reading glass 3 ...

Page 247: ...the arrow so that the contact image sensor CIS 2 is where indicated in the figure F 5 73 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the CIS home position sensor 3 When detaching the sensor do so as if to push it under the claw 2 found at the rear F 5 74 After replacing the sensor pull the drive belt rear 1 in the direction of the arrow so that the contact image sensor CIS 2 is returned to the farthes...

Page 248: ...0 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the copyboard cover or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 78 When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the following glass surface standard white plate The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 249: ...nsor 0006 9774 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the cover 1 F 5 80 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the flexible cable 2 F 5 81 3 Remove the 8 screws 2 and detach the cover 3 F 5 82 4 Free the hook 1 and detach the original sensor 1 2 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 250: ...0007 3423 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the copyboard cover or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 85 When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the following glass surface standard white plate The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it with lint free paper moistene...

Page 251: ...5 87 5 4 8 3 Removing the ADF Reading Glass 0007 3427 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the copyboard glass or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 3 Remove the ADF reading glass 3 F 5 88 When removing the ADF reading glass take care not to touch the glass surface The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found be sure to clean it usin...

Page 252: ...ensor CIS 2 is where it is indicated in the figure F 5 89 2 Peel the protective sheet 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Free the cable from the wire saddle 3 and remove the screw 4 then detach the reader heater left 5 F 5 90 After replacing the reader heater pull the drive belt rear 1 in the direction of the arrow so that the contact image sensor is returned to the farthest left F 5 91 ...

Page 253: ...Chapter 6 Laser Exposure ...

Page 254: ......

Page 255: ...and off the Laser Light 6 7 6 3 1 2 Main Scanning Synchronous Control 6 8 6 3 2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light 6 9 6 3 2 1 APC Control 6 9 6 3 3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6 10 6 3 3 1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6 10 6 3 4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6 10 6 3 4 1 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6 10 6 4 Parts Replacement Procedure 6 12 6 4 1 Laser Scanner Unit 6 12 6 4 ...

Page 256: ......

Page 257: ...beams 2 Output 5mW iR2270 2870 2230 2830 10mW iR3570 4570 3530 Wave length 785 nm 800 nm infrared light Type of motor DC brushless motor Number of revolutions 16000 rpm approx single control iR2270 2870 2230 2830 27000 rpm 16000 rpm approx double control iR3570 4570 3530 Type of bearing Oil Number of facets 6 40 mm dia Synchronous control Main scanning direction Light intensity control APC Others ...

Page 258: ...he laser exposure system is primarily controlled by the DC controller PCB iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F 2230 2230F 2830 Laser scanner motor control Laser shutter control Name Description 1 Laser unit Generates laser light 2 Polygon mirror Scans laser light in main scanning direction 3 BD mirror Reflects laser light in the direction of the BD PCB 4 BD PCB Generates the BD signal 1 2 4 3 ...

Page 259: ...0 3570F 4570 4570F 3530 J318 J601 1 4 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J317 J604 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 J316 J603 1 2 3 PWCHG 5V GND VDO2 GND VDO2 CNT2 CNT1 CNT0 VDO1 GND VDO1 POLYGON FG 24V P ACC P DEC GND 3 3V BD GND ...

Page 260: ...gnal CNT2 Laser driver control signal VDO2 Image data signal input PWCHG Light intensify switchover signal FG PULSE DETECT FG PULSE detecting signal POLYGON FG FG output signal J318 J601 1 4 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J317 J602 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 J316 J603 1 2 3 PWCHG 5V GND VDO2 GND VDO2 CNT2 CNT1 CNT0 VDO1 GND VDO1 STAND BY FG PULSE DETECT POLYGON...

Page 261: ...P ACC Motor acceleration signal P DEC Motor deceleration signal BD BD output level single Single Description ...

Page 262: ...he motor rotation reaches its target revolution the machine turns on the laser unit Thereafter when the Start key is turned on the machine generates the image request signal PVREQ on the printer side and turns on the laser beam with reference to the generated signal A4 1 Copy F 6 4 PRINT STBY STBY INTR PVREQ BD BD detection APC control ON APC control ON Laser A BD detention APC control ON ...

Page 263: ... is turned on and off according to the combination of laser control signals CNT0 1 2 from the DC controller PCB T 6 7 Laser control signal Laser status CNT2 CNT1 CNT0 Laser A Laser B 0 1 0 ON for APC control OFF 0 1 1 OFF OFF 0 0 1 OFF ON for APC control 0 1 1 OFF OFF 1 1 1 Video signal input enabled Video signal input enabled 0 1 1 OFF OFF 0 0 1 OFF ON for APC control 0 1 1 OFF OFF ...

Page 264: ...uit based on the BD synch signal Using the BD signal generated based on the light from laser A the DC controller PCB generates the BD synch signal for laser A and the BD synch signal for laser B The image data written to line memory is read out by the readout enable signal RE_A RE_B generated based on the BD synch signal BD_A BD_B for output to the laser driver PCB J318 DC CON CNT0 CNT1 CNT2 ...

Page 265: ...light from laser A only and is free of light from laser B i e the BD signal is generated based on the light from laser A 6 3 2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light 6 3 2 1 APC Control 0006 5976 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The laser light hitting the photodiode included in the laserdiode is monitored and is controlled so that it remains a J318 J316 J301 MN CON 3 3 2 DC CON BD_A RE_A BD_B...

Page 266: ...of the acceleration signal ACC signal and the deceleration signal DEC signal F 6 7 6 3 4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6 3 4 1 Controlling the Laser Shutter 0006 5979 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 When the right door is opened the laser shutter link operating in conjunction with the cover causes the laser shutter to move down thus blocking the path of the laser light If the machine identifies...

Page 267: ...Chapter 6 6 11 F 6 8 1 Laser shutter 2 Laser shutter link operates in conjunction with front cover 3 Laser unit 1 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 DOOR CLOSED DOOR OPEN ...

Page 268: ...t in the direction of the arrow F 6 10 6 4 1 2 Removing the Left Cover 0007 8349 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the left cover 2 F 6 11 6 4 1 3 Removing the Laser Unit 0007 8350 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 F 6 12 When you have disconnected the connector 1 be sure to take care so that it will...

Page 269: ...ve the screw 1 and detach the fixing 2 F 6 14 4 Lift the front of the laser unit 1 and slide it to the front F 6 15 When sliding out the laser scanner unit be sure to take care not to touch the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting ...

Page 270: ......

Page 271: ...Chapter 7 Image Formation ...

Page 272: ......

Page 273: ... Mechanism 7 12 7 5 1 1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias 7 12 7 5 1 2 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism 7 12 7 6 Drum Cleaner Unit 7 14 7 6 1 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning 7 14 7 7 Developing Unit 7 15 7 7 1 Controlling the Developing Bias 7 15 7 8 Toner Container 7 16 7 8 1 Overview 7 16 7 8 2 Route of Toner Supply 7 17 7 8 3 Controlling the Drive of the Toner Cartridge 7 18 7 8 4 To...

Page 274: ...rum Unit 7 41 7 12 3 5 Removing the Developing Assembly 7 43 7 12 3 6 Removing the Upper Tray 7 45 7 12 3 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 7 46 7 12 3 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 7 46 7 12 3 9 Removing the Left Cover 7 47 7 12 3 10 Removing the Laser Unit 7 48 7 12 3 11 Removing the Hopper Assembly 7 50 7 12 4 Sub Hopper 7 51 7 12 4 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 7 51 7 12 4 2 Removing t...

Page 275: ...88 7 12 9 9 Removing the Left Cover 7 89 7 12 9 10 Removing the Laser Unit 7 90 7 12 9 11 Removing the Hopper Assembly 7 92 7 12 9 12 Removing the Toner Level Sensor 7 93 7 12 10 Toner Feedscrew Motor 7 94 7 12 10 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 7 94 7 12 10 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 7 94 7 12 10 3 Removing the Toner Cartridge 7 95 7 12 10 4 Removing the Drum Unit 7 96 7 12 10 5 Removing the...

Page 276: ......

Page 277: ...m type OPC Drum diameter 30 mm Cleaning mechanism by cleaning blade Process speed 230 mm sec iR3570 4570 3530 137 mm sec iR2270 2870 2230 2830 Primary charging Charging method by roller AC DC Charging roller diameter 16 mm Cleaning mechanism by brush roller reciprocating mechanism Transfer charging Charging method by roller DC Charging roller diameter 16 mm LED 12 pc Timing of light emission in re...

Page 278: ...ingle component toner projection method application of AC DC Toner single component insulating magnetic toner Toner level detection by toner level sensor inside sub hopper and developing assembly Toner level detection none Toner variable resistor 1220 g iR3570 4570 3530 1060 g iR2270 2870 2230 2830 separation method by static eliminator curvature Waste toner collection to waste toner case ...

Page 279: ...Chapter 7 7 3 F 7 1 1 Toner cartridge 2 Sub hopper 3 Developing unit 4 Photosensitive drum 5 Transfer roller 6 Primary charging roller 7 Drum unit 8 Drum cleaning unit 1 2 3 7 8 4 5 6 ...

Page 280: ...posure removes residual charges from the drum 2 Primary charging charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to a uniform negative potential 3 Laser exposure forms a latent static image on the drum 4 Development forms a visible image on the drum 5 Transfer transfers images from the drum to paper 6 Separation separates paper from the drum 7 Drum cleaning removes toner from the drum 6 B 4 2 7 5 3...

Page 281: ... between the drum surface and the developing sleeve causes toner to adhere to the latent static image on the drum turning the image into a visible image 2 The bias voltage applied to the transfer roller causes the toner to move from the drum to paper 3 The cleaning blade in contact with the drum scrapes off the residual toner from the drum ...

Page 282: ...g bias 2600 V is applied 7 3 2 Sequence of Operation initial rotation 0006 6867 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Pickup motor Registration ON Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_CL Transfer TR Static removal SEP 1 Registration ON Multifeeder ON Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC...

Page 283: ...8 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 The sequence of operation during copying is as follows Pickup motor Registration ON Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_CL Transfer TR Static removal SEP 1 Registration ON Multifeeder ON Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_...

Page 284: ...tion sequence 1st sheet Image formation sequence 2nd sheet and later Sheet to sheet sequence Registration ON Registration ON Image write end Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_CL Transfer TR Static removal SEP 1 Image sequence 1st sheet Image formation sequence 2nd sheet and later Sheet to sheet sequence Registration ON ...

Page 285: ...follows F 7 11 In 1 above a cleaning bias 2600 V is applied Image write end Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_CL Transfer TR Static removal SEP 1 Image write end Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_CL Transfer TR Static removal SEP 1 ...

Page 286: ...3570 iR4570 iR3530 The term APVC stands for auto primary voltage control and it is a mechanism used to control the primary charging application voltage DC component to suit the film thickness of the machine s photosensitive drum APVC is performed every 500 sheets while the machine is in operation It is forcibly performed when the drum unit is replaced 1 Drum film thickness detection control correc...

Page 287: ... 7 11 7 4 3 ATVC Control 0006 5989 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The machine is provided with a constant current control mechanism that can be enabled or disabled in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY TRANS SW ...

Page 288: ...age is being formed until the end of the ongoing job 7 5 1 2 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism 0006 5992 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The machine uses a brush 3 to clean the primary charging roller 2 which remains in contact with the photosensitive drum 1 The brush has a reciprocating mechanism and is driven by a cam 4 operating while the photosensitive drum is being driven AC bias ...

Page 289: ...F 7 13 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 290: ...e Drum Cleaning 0007 5224 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The cleaning blade is kept in contact with the surface of the photosensitive drum It serves to scrape off the residual toner left behind from transfer to paper for collection in the waste toner box ...

Page 291: ...ontrolling the Developing Bias 0006 6032 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 T 7 9 Developing Bias Both these AC and DC biases are applied while an image is being formed but are not applied between sheets AC bias 800 Vp p DC bias 450 V to 650 V ...

Page 292: ...he cartridge is filled with 1 component insulating magnetic toner if iR3570 4570 1220 g if iR2270 2870 1060 g When the sub hopper requests a supply of toner the cartridge itself rotates to feed toner The machine s toner cartridge serves as a hopper as it is found in past models iR3570 iR4570 F 7 14 iR2270 iR2870 F 7 15 Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge ...

Page 293: ...lted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down F 7 16 7 8 2 Route of Toner Supply 0006 6363 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 When the user fits the toner cartridge 1 in place toner is temporarily stored in the sub hopper 2 inside which is a sensor that makes sure that the amount of toner remains at a specific level at all times When the developing assembly 4 requests a suppl...

Page 294: ...iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 When a request is made for a supply of toner the toner cartridge drive motor rotates in the direction shown in the following figure its drive is transmitted from the drive motor to the toner cartridge thus rotating the toner cartridge F 7 18 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 295: ...etected inside the developing assembly E020 0000 If the absence of toner is detected by the developing assembly toner level sensor and the presence of toner is detected by the hopper toner level sensor the route of supply from the sub hopper to the developing assembly may be clogged or the output of these toner sensors may be faulty This error code will be indicated when the soft counter reaches 1...

Page 296: ...ive sampling of periods when the clutch is on as the unit of measurement if the presence of toner is detected 3 times or more it will assume that there is toner inside the developing assembly if the presence of toner is detected less than 3 times on the other hand it will assume that there is no toner inside the developing assembly However in the case of the iR3570 iR4570 Series machines the drive...

Page 297: ...30 The machine changes the output depending on the site environment absolute moisture content paper type paper width and source of paper Environment 5 settings according to absolute moisture content Paper type plain paper envelope heavy paper tracing paper transparency bond paper label sheet Paper width size boundaries as defined by 2 points Source of paper if from cassette including pedestal if f...

Page 298: ...rum by applying a cleaning bias to the roller Once the toner reaches the drum it is scraped by the photosensitive drum cleaning blade for collection in the waste toner box 7 9 4 Separation Mechanism 7 9 4 1 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias 0006 6001 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Static Eliminator Bias 1st side 2300 V 2nd side 3000 V A DC bias is applied between sheets while an image is ...

Page 299: ...2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 To prevent soiling of the transfer guide with toner or the photosensitive drum with toner images the following transfer guide bias is applied to the transfer guide The surface of the transfer guide is covered with an insulating sheet Transfer guide bias 1st side 570 V 2nd side 740 V ...

Page 300: ...nd at the front of the machine The waste toner feedscrew is operated by the drive from the drum flange 7 11 3 Checking the Waste Toner Box 0006 6036 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 To prevent leakage of waste toner from the waste toner box or to prevent overloading the waste toner feedscrew the machine is equipped with a waste toner detection mechanism The waste toner box can hold about 2043 cc...

Page 301: ...ntifies the waste toner full sensor as being continuously on for 2000 sheets it will indicate a warning if it then detects the activation of the sensor for 100 sheets continuously it will indicate E190 000 The count is increased coinciding with delivery ...

Page 302: ...f the arrow F 7 22 7 12 1 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8031 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the waste toner case 1 F 7 23 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught ...

Page 303: ...attering may be resulted if it comes off by accident 2 Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing Since the toner stop 1 comes off easily as mentioned above toner scattering may be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down F 7 27 7 12 1 4 Removing the Drum Unit 0007 8343 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 28 2 Remove the screw 1 F 7...

Page 304: ... the drum unit 1 F 7 32 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown F 7 33 7 12 1 5 Removing the Developing Assembly 0007 8344 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 F 7 34 2 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly ...

Page 305: ...e developing assembly 1 F 7 37 Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown F 7 38 When fitting the developing assembly be sure to fit the lower right segment 2 of the developing assembly 1 in the rail 3 of the machine Thereafter slide the developing assembly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail F 7 39 ...

Page 306: ... it toward the front F 7 41 7 12 1 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007 8346 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then detach the toner bottle cover 2 F 7 42 7 12 1 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 0007 8347 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 relay connectors 2 F 7 43 2 While freeing the lock 1 toward the right detach the ...

Page 307: ... unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 7 47 7 12 2 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8030 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the waste toner case 1 F 7 48 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty detection ...

Page 308: ...70 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 50 2 Remove the screw 1 F 7 51 3 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 7 52 4 Remove the screw 1 F 7 53 5 Remove the drum unit 1 F 7 54 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown ...

Page 309: ...ver unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 7 57 7 12 3 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8017 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the waste toner case 1 F 7 58 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty detecti...

Page 310: ...he like when and after removing the toner cartridge Since the toner stop comes off easily toner scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident 2 Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing Since the toner stop 1 comes off easily as mentioned above toner scattering may be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down F 7 62 7 12 3 4 Removing the Drum Unit 00...

Page 311: ...eft to release the developing assembly F 7 65 4 Remove the screw 1 F 7 66 5 Remove the drum unit 1 F 7 67 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown F 7 68 7 12 3 5 Removing the Developing Assembly 0007 8353 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 ...

Page 312: ...disconnect the connector 2 F 7 71 4 Remove the developing assembly 1 F 7 72 Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown F 7 73 When fitting the developing assembly be sure to fit the lower right segment 2 of the developing assembly 1 in the rail 3 of the machine Thereafter slide the developing assembly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail ...

Page 313: ...of the upper tray 1 and detach it as if to slide it toward the front F 7 76 7 12 3 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007 8355 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then detach the toner bottle cover 2 F 7 77 7 12 3 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 0007 8357 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 relay connectors 2 ...

Page 314: ...g the Laser Unit 0007 8359 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 F 7 82 When you have disconnected the connector 1 be sure to take care so that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment variable resistor Contact with the PCB can change the adju...

Page 315: ...he PCB is equipped with a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting 7 12 3 11 Removing the Hopper Assembly 0007 8360 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the inside base cover 1 and the inside right color 2 F 7 86 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 found at the front and the connector 2 found at the rear F 7 87 3 Open the 11...

Page 316: ...with power leading to image faults F 7 90 7 12 4 Sub Hopper 7 12 4 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 8020 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the front cover 1 F 7 91 2 Remove the face cover rubber 1 3 Remove the binding screw 2 4 Remove the RS tightening screw 3 5 Detach the front cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 7 92 7 12 4 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8...

Page 317: ...270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Shift up the lever 1 F 7 95 2 Remove the toner cartridge 1 F 7 96 Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge 1 Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop 1 against the covers or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge Since the toner stop comes off easily toner scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident 2 Keep the toner cartridge h...

Page 318: ...iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 98 2 Remove the screw 1 F 7 99 3 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 7 100 4 Remove the screw 1 F 7 101 5 Remove the drum unit 1 F 7 102 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown 1 ...

Page 319: ...70 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 F 7 104 2 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 7 105 3 Slide the developing assembly 1 slightly to the front then disconnect the connector 2 F 7 106 4 Remove the developing assembly 1 F 7 107 ...

Page 320: ...that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail F 7 109 7 12 4 6 Removing the Upper Tray 0007 8389 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the upper tray 2 F 7 110 Reference Lift the front of the upper tray 1 and detach it as if to slide it toward the front F 7 111 7 12 4 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007 8390 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remov...

Page 321: ...113 2 While freeing the lock 1 toward the right detach the pre exposure lamp 2 F 7 114 F 7 115 7 12 4 9 Removing the Left Cover 0007 8392 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the left cover 2 F 7 116 7 12 4 10 Removing the Laser Unit 0007 8393 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 322: ...the connector 2 F 7 118 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing 2 F 7 119 4 Lift the front of the laser unit 1 and slide it to the front F 7 120 When sliding out the laser scanner unit be sure to take care not to touch the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setti...

Page 323: ...123 4 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the hopper assembly 2 F 7 124 When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine be sure that the connectors 1 are securely connected If the connectors 1 are not connected the environment heater will not be supplied with power leading to image faults F 7 125 7 12 4 12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor 0007 8395 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect th...

Page 324: ...move the screw 1 and detach the toner feedscrew motor 3 from the base F 7 128 7 12 4 13 Removing the Sub Hopper 0007 8396 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 from the back of the sub hopper 1 F 7 129 2 Check the phase of the gear 1 shown in the figure F 7 130 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 ...

Page 325: ...ase the arm 2 F 7 133 6 Remove the bushing unit 2 from the sub hopper 1 F 7 134 7 Disconnect the connector 1 F 7 135 8 Detach the sub hopper 1 from the bottom F 7 136 7 12 5 Developing Assembly 7 12 5 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 8022 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the front cover 1 ...

Page 326: ...r case 1 F 7 139 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in something and is not moved smoothly F 7 140 7 12 5 3 Removing the Developing Assembly 0007 8034 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR457...

Page 327: ...e developing assembly 1 F 7 144 Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown F 7 145 When fitting the developing assembly be sure to fit the lower right segment 2 of the developing assembly 1 in the rail 3 of the machine Thereafter slide the developing assembly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail F 7 146 ...

Page 328: ...2 F 7 147 2 While freeing the claw 1 detach the sleeve front guide 2 in the direction of the arrow F 7 148 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the angle adjusting plate 2 F 7 149 4 Remove the E ring 1 then remove the washer 2 bearing 3 gear 4 and parallel pin 5 F 7 150 5 Remove the screw 1 and detach the gear unit 2 F 7 151 6 Remove the sleeve bushing 1 gear 2 and parallel pin 3 ...

Page 329: ...hing Be sure that the longer protrusion 5 is on the developing cylinder side Otherwise you will not be able to fit the gear unit 7 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the washer 2 then detach the transfer upper guide 3 F 7 153 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the blade unit 2 F 7 154 9 Remove the 2 screws 1 then remove the 2 bearings 2 and the sleeve holder rear 3 F 7 155 10 Remove the grip ring 1 ...

Page 330: ...eveloping cylinder be sure to fit it first to the developing unit 4 Do not touch the developing cylinder or subject it to impact 7 12 7 Transfer Charging Roller 7 12 7 1 Removing the Transfer Roller 0007 8431 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 158 2 Pull off the pin 1 toward the front F 7 159 3 Remove the holder 1 from the front of the transfer roller F 7 160 4 Remove t...

Page 331: ...tightening screw 3 5 Detach the front cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 7 165 7 12 8 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8015 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the waste toner case 1 F 7 166 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that ...

Page 332: ...cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 7 169 7 12 9 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8025 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the waste toner case 1 F 7 170 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty det...

Page 333: ...he like when and after removing the toner cartridge Since the toner stop comes off easily toner scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident 2 Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing Since the toner stop 1 comes off easily as mentioned above toner scattering may be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down F 7 174 7 12 9 4 Removing the Drum Unit 0...

Page 334: ...ft to release the developing assembly F 7 177 4 Remove the screw 1 F 7 178 5 Remove the drum unit 1 F 7 179 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown F 7 180 7 12 9 5 Removing the Developing Assembly 0007 8366 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 ...

Page 335: ...isconnect the connector 2 F 7 183 4 Remove the developing assembly 1 F 7 184 Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown F 7 185 When fitting the developing assembly be sure to fit the lower right segment 2 of the developing assembly 1 in the rail 3 of the machine Thereafter slide the developing assembly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail ...

Page 336: ...of the upper tray 1 and detach it as if to slide it toward the front F 7 188 7 12 9 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007 8368 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then detach the toner bottle cover 2 F 7 189 7 12 9 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 0007 8369 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 relay connectors 2 ...

Page 337: ...ing the Laser Unit 0007 8371 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 F 7 194 When you have disconnected the connector 1 be sure to take care so that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment variable resistor Contact with the PCB can change the a...

Page 338: ...The PCB is equipped with a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting 7 12 9 11 Removing the Hopper Assembly 0007 8372 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the inside base cover 1 and the inside right color 2 F 7 198 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 found at the front and the connector 2 found at the rear F 7 199 3 Open the...

Page 339: ...F 7 202 7 12 9 12 Removing the Toner Level Sensor 0007 8373 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the toner sensor 3 F 7 203 7 12 10 Toner Feedscrew Motor 7 12 10 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 8019 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the front cover 1 F 7 204 2 Remove the face cover rubber 1 3 Remove the binding screw 2 4...

Page 340: ...e the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in something and is not moved smoothly F 7 207 7 12 10 3 Removing the Toner Cartridge 0007 8375 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Shift up the lever 1 F 7 208 2 Remove the toner cartridge 1 F 7 209 Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridg...

Page 341: ...g Since the toner stop 1 comes off easily as mentioned above toner scattering may be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down F 7 210 7 12 10 4 Removing the Drum Unit 0007 8376 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 211 2 Remove the screw 1 F 7 212 3 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 7 213 4 Remove the ...

Page 342: ...moving the Developing Assembly 0007 8377 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 F 7 217 2 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 7 218 3 Slide the developing assembly 1 slightly to the front then disconnect the connector 2 F 7 219 ...

Page 343: ... the developing assembly 1 in the rail 3 of the machine Thereafter slide the developing assembly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail F 7 222 7 12 10 6 Removing the Upper Tray 0007 8378 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the upper tray 2 F 7 223 Reference Lift the front of the upper tray 1 and detach it as if to slide it toward the front ...

Page 344: ...7 12 10 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 0007 8381 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 relay connectors 2 F 7 226 2 While freeing the lock 1 toward the right detach the pre exposure lamp 2 F 7 227 F 7 228 7 12 10 9 Removing the Left Cover 0007 8382 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the left cover 2 ...

Page 345: ...o take care so that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment variable resistor Contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting 2 Open the wire saddle 1 and disconnect the connector 2 F 7 231 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing 2 F 7 232 4 Lift the front of the laser unit 1 and slide it t...

Page 346: ...0 1 Remove the inside base cover 1 and the inside right color 2 F 7 234 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 found at the front and the connector 2 found at the rear F 7 235 3 Open the 11 wire saddles 1 and pull out the harness 3 through the hole 2 in the plate F 7 236 4 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the hopper assembly 2 F 7 237 When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine be sure that the conne...

Page 347: ... detach the toner feedscrew motor assembly 2 F 7 240 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the toner feedscrew motor 3 from the base F 7 241 7 12 11 Static Charge Eliminator 7 12 11 1 Removing the Static Eliminator 0007 8428 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 242 2 Remove the screw 1 F 7 243 3 Detach the static eliminator 1 to the front F 7 244 ...

Page 348: ......

Page 349: ...Chapter 8 Pickup Feeding System ...

Page 350: ......

Page 351: ...t of Sensors 8 16 8 1 16 Arrangement of Sensors 8 17 8 1 17 Route of Drive 8 19 8 1 18 Route of Drive 8 19 8 2 Basic Sequence 8 22 8 2 1 Basic Sequence 8 22 8 2 2 Increase in Speed 8 22 8 2 3 Acceleration Intervals 8 25 8 2 4 Increase in Speed 8 27 8 3 Detecting Jams 8 30 8 3 1 Delay Jams 8 30 8 3 1 1 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly 8 30 8 3 1 2 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Asse...

Page 352: ...ller Separation Roller 8 78 8 8 4 Sensor Mount 8 78 8 8 4 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 78 8 8 4 2 Removing the Right Door 8 79 8 8 4 3 Removing the Right Door 8 81 8 8 4 4 Removing the Right Cover lower front 8 82 8 8 4 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 8 83 8 8 4 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 8 84 8 8 4 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 8 84 8 8 4 8 Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate 8 ...

Page 353: ... 8 10 2 Removing the Right Door 8 116 8 8 10 3 Removing the Right Door 8 119 8 8 10 4 Removing the Right Cover lower front 8 120 8 8 10 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 8 121 8 8 10 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 8 121 8 8 10 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 8 122 8 8 10 8 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor A B 8 123 8 8 11 Slide Resistor 8 123 8 8 11 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 ...

Page 354: ...Right Door 8 163 8 8 17 3 Removing the Right Door 8 165 8 8 17 4 Removing the Rear Cover 8 166 8 8 17 5 Removing the Main Power Switch 8 167 8 8 17 6 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Clutch 8 168 8 8 18 Manual Separation Pad 8 169 8 8 18 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 169 8 8 18 2 Removing the Right Door 8 169 8 8 18 3 Removing the Right Door 8 171 8 8 18 4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 8 172 8 ...

Page 355: ...99 8 8 25 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 199 8 8 25 2 Removing the Front Cover Unit 8 199 8 8 25 3 Removing the Delivery Tray 8 200 8 8 25 4 Removing the Right Door 8 201 8 8 25 5 Removing the Right Door 8 203 8 8 25 6 Removing the Extension Delivery Kit 8 204 8 8 25 7 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1 8 205 8 8 26 Fixing Delivery Drive Assembly 8 206 8 8 26 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 206...

Page 356: ......

Page 357: ...per size cassette 1 B4 A4 B5 LGL LTR EXE A4R B5R LTRR A5R STMTR cassette 2 A3 B4 A4 B5 LGL LTR EXE LDR A4R B5R LTRR A5R STMTR manual feed tray A3 B4 A4 B5 LDR LGL LTR A4R B5R LTRR A5R STMTR EXE postcard envelope free size Paper weight cassette 1 2 64 to 80 g m2 single sided 64 to 80 g m2 auto double sided manual feed tray 64 to 128 g m2 if double sided manual feeding only no auto duplexing Paper s...

Page 358: ...Inner Puncher Kit Q1 R1 S1 T1 Punch Unit L1 M1 N1 P1 Pickup accessory Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 Side Paper Deck Q1 Envelope Cassette Attachment C1 Item Description Paper compartment front loading Pickup method cassette separation retard manual feeder separation pad Paper reference center Paper volume cassette 1 2 550 sheets 80 g m2 manual feed tray 50 sheets 80 g m2 Paper size cassette 1 B4 A4 B5 L...

Page 359: ...ay by the user Duplexing method through path envelopes Com10 Monarch DL ISO C5 ISO B5 postcard A6R non default A5R non default A4 non default Speed of process iR2230 2830 137 mm sec iR3530 230mm sec nomal mode 137mm sec low speed mode manual feeding Delivery accessory 3 Way Unit A1 standard with iR4570 3570 model Inner 2 Way Tray D1 Copy Tray J1 Finisher S1 Buffer Path Unit E1 Inner Puncher Kit Q1...

Page 360: ... 2 Pickup assembly cassette 1 3 Manual feed pickup assembly 4 Registration roller assembly 5 Transfer assembly 6 Duplexing feeding assembly 7 Fixing assembly 8 No 1 delivery assembly 8 1 4 Division into Blocks 0007 1444 iR3570 iR4570 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 361: ...assette 1 3 Manual feed pickup assembly 4 Registration roller assembly 5 Transfer assembly 6 Duplexing feeding assembly 7 Fixing assembly 8 No 1 delivery assembly 9 No 2 No 3 delivery assembly 8 1 5 Arrangement of Rollers 0006 7402 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 362: ...al path roller 2 8 Vertical path slave roller 2 9 Vertical path roller 1 10 Vertical path slave roller 1 11 Manual feed pickup roller 12 Registration roller inside 13 Registration roller outside 14 Duplexing feed roller 2 15 Duplexing feeding member 2 16 Transfer roller 17 Drum 18 Duplexing feed roller 1 19 Duplexing feeding member 1 3 2 1 4 6 5 7 9 8 12 11 10 14 16 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1...

Page 363: ... member 8 1 6 Arrangement of Rollers 0007 1461 iR3570 iR4570 F 8 4 1 Pickup roller cassette 1 2 Feed roller cassette 1 3 Separation roller cassette 1 4 Pickup roller cassette 2 5 Feed roller cassette 2 6 Separation roller cassette 2 14 16 15 17 18 19 20 22 21 23 13 12 9 11 10 3 2 1 4 6 5 7 8 34 35 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 ...

Page 364: ...ber 1 20 Presser roller 21 Fixing film 22 Fixing outlet roller 23 Fixing outlet roll 24 Delivery roll No 3 delivery assembly 25 Delivery roller No 3 delivery assembly 26 Duplexing inlet roller 27 Duplexing inlet member 28 Vertical path slave roller 3 29 Vertical path roller 3 30 Delivery roller No 2 delivery assembly 31 Delivery member No 2 delivery assembly 32 Reversing roller 33 Reversing member...

Page 365: ... from cassette 1 2 Pickup from cassette 2 3 Pickup from cassette pedestal 4 Pickup from side paper deck 5 Pickup from manual feeder 6 Delivery from copy tray 1 8 1 8 Paper Path printer unit on its own 0009 2978 iR3530 2 1 5 4 6 3 ...

Page 366: ... 1 Pickup from cassette 1 2 Pickup from cassette 2 3 Pickup from cassette pedestal optional 4 Pickup from manual feeder 5 Delivery to output tray 1 8 1 9 Diagram of Paper Paths w copy tray 0007 1484 iR3570 iR4570 2 1 4 5 3 ...

Page 367: ...from cassette pedestal option 4 Pickup from side paper deck option 5 Pickup from manual feeder 6 Delivery to copy tray 1 7 Delivery to copy tray 2 option 8 Delivery to copy tray 3 option 8 1 10 Diagram of Paper Paths w 3 Way Unit A1 copy tray 0006 7404 iR2270 iR2870 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 368: ...ckup from cassette pedestal option 4 Pickup from side paper deck option 5 Pickup from manual feeder 6 Delivery to copy tray 1 7 Delivery to copy tray 2 option 8 Delivery to copy tray 3 option 8 1 11 Paper path w expansion output kit output tray 0009 2980 iR3530 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 369: ... Pickup from cassette pedestal option 4 Pickup from manual feeder 5 Delivery to output tray 1 6 Delivery to output tray 2 optional 7 Delivery to output tray 3 optional 8 1 12 Diagram of Paper Paths w Finisher S1 copy tray 0006 7405 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 370: ...up from cassette 2 3 Pickup from cassette pedestal option 4 Pickup from paper deck option 5 Pickup from manual feeder 6 Delivery to Finisher S1 option 7 Delivery to copy tray 3 option 8 1 13 Paper Path w Finer S1 output tray 0009 2982 iR3530 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 371: ...assette 2 3 Pickup from cassette pedestal optional 4 Pickup from manual feeder 5 Delivery to Finisher S1 optional 6 Delivery to output tray 3 optional 8 1 14 Diagram of Paper Paths w Finisher Q3 Saddle Finisher Q4 0006 7406 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 372: ...sette 2 3 Pickup from cassette pedestal option 4 Pickup from paper deck option 5 Pickup from manual feeder 6 Delivery to Finisher Q3 Saddle Finisher Q4 option 7 No 2 delivery assembly option 8 1 15 Arrangement of Sensors 0006 7408 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 373: ...2 paper sensor PS2 6 Cassette 2 retry sensor PS11 7 Cassette 1 paper sensor PS1 8 Cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 9 Manual feeder paper sensor PS7 10 Registration sensor PS9 11 Duplexing feed sensor PS17 12 Fixing delivery paper sensor PS13 14 Delivery sensor 1 PS14 15 Delivery paper full sensor 1 PS15 8 1 16 Arrangement of Sensors 0007 1487 iR3570 iR4570 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 13 12 14 6 ...

Page 374: ...te 2 retry sensor PS11 7 Cassette 1 paper sensor PS1 8 Cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 9 Manual feed paper sensor PS7 10 Registration sensor PS9 11 Duplexing feed sensor PS17 12 Fixing delivery sensor PS13 13 Duplexing inlet sensor PS3A 14 Delivery sensor 3 PS5A 15 Delivery sensor 1 PS14 16 Delivery sensor 2 PS1A 17 Reversal sensor PS4A 18 Delivery full sensor 2 PS2A 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 15 12 19 6 ...

Page 375: ...otor M3 Fixing motor M4 No 1 delivery motor M6 Cassette 1 pickup motor M7 Cassette 2 pickup motor SL1 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL2 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid CL1 Manual pickup clutch CL2 Registration clutch CL6 Duplexing clutch 8 1 18 Route of Drive 0007 9020 iR3570 iR4570 CL1 M2 M7 CL2 SL2 SL1 CL6 M4 M3 M6 ...

Page 376: ...4 No 1 delivery motor M6 Cassette 1 pickup motor M7 Cassette 2 pickup motor M10 Duplexing motor SL1 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL2 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid CL1 Manual pickup clutch CL2 Registration clutch Expancion Delivery Unit CL1 M10 M2 M7 CL2 SL2 SL1 M4 M3 M6 ...

Page 377: ...Chapter 8 8 21 F 8 17 M1 No 2 delivery motor M2 No 3 delivery motor SL1 No 1 delivery solenoid SL2 No 2 delivery solenoid SL3 No 3 delivery solenoid SL1 SL2 M1 M2 SL3 ...

Page 378: ...w and the associated accessories for the increase in speed are as follows No Delivery Accessory Print Start Cassette 1 pickup motor M6 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL1 Cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 Main motor M2 Registration sensor PS9 Registration clutch CL2 Fixing motor M11 Fixing delivery paper sensor PS13 No 1 delivery motor M4 Delivery sensor 1 PS14 1 3 2 PRINT 1 pickup 3 registration 2 pre regi...

Page 379: ...crease in Speed for Pickup Operation The speed is 1 5 times as high as the process speed no increase if for manual feed pickup in the case of the 1st sheet from cassette 1 accelerates to about twice as fast Finisher S1 in Use 1 ...

Page 380: ...igh as the process speed no increase if for manual feed pickup in the case of the 1st sheet from cassette 1 accelerates to about twice as fast 2 Increase in Speed for Reversal The speed is 3 4 times as high as the process speed no increase if for delivery to tray 3 Finisher Q3 Q4 in Use 1 2 ...

Page 381: ...gh as the process speed 3 Increase in Speed for the Buffer Path The speed is 2 5 times as high as the process speed no increase if for delivery to saddle 4 Increase in Speed for Reversal The speed is 3 4 times as high as the process speed 8 2 3 Acceleration Intervals 0009 2984 iR3530 The machine accelerates the speed of paper movement over specific intervals These intervals are as shown and differ...

Page 382: ...lerates the speed to about 1 5 times as high as its process speed No acceleration occurs if the pickup is from the manual feeder In the case of the 1s side of a sheet picked up from cassette 1 the movement will be about twice as fast In the Presence of the Finisher S1 1 ...

Page 383: ...m cassette 1 the movement will be about twice as fast 2 Reversal acceleration interval The machine accelerates the speed to about 3 4 times as high as its process speed No acceleration will occur if the delivery is to tray 3 8 2 4 Increase in Speed 0007 8663 iR3570 iR4570 The machine increases the speed of moving paper over specific intervals An overview and the associated accessories for the incr...

Page 384: ...p The speed is 1 5 times as high as the process speed in the case of manual feed decelerates to about 0 6 2 Increase in Speed for Reversal The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed no increase if for delivery to tray 3 Finisher Q3 Q4 in Use 1 2 ...

Page 385: ... Increase in Speed for Pickup The speed is 1 5 times as high as the process speed in the cassette of manual feed decelerates to about 0 6 2 Increase in Speed for Reversal The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed 1 2 ...

Page 386: ...dentified if the delay jam sensor does not go on within a specific length of time after the sensor N has gone on F 8 26 T 8 3 8 3 1 2 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly 0007 2664 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The leading edge of paper does not reach the sensor after the cassette 1 2 pickup motor has started to rotate Sensor Registration sensor PS9 Fixing delivery sensor PS13 No 1 delivery sen...

Page 387: ...te 1 cassette 1 pickup motor cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 Cassette 2 cassette 2 pickup motor cassette 2 retry sensor PS11 Sensor Cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 Cassette 2 retry sensor PS11 Registration sensor PS9 Jam check Sensor N Pickup motor Normal 1 specific length of feed in time Error Start key ON or PRINT set 1 1 INTR PRINT Jam Check Sensor N Normal L paper length feed distance A specific fee...

Page 388: ...m 0007 2668 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 A door open jam is identified when the machine detects the opening of the door while it is making copies prints T 8 7 Fixing outlet sensor PS13 No 1 delivery sensor PS14 Duplex feed sensor PS17 Sensor Cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 Cassette 2 retry sensor PS11 Registration sensor PS9 Fixing outlet sensor PS13 No 1 delivery sensor PS14 Duplex feed sensor PS17 S...

Page 389: ...ller serve to make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved to the feed path and the paper is moved as far as the registration roller by the work of the vertical path roller The pickup vertical path roller pickup roller feed roller and separation roller are driven by the cassette pickup motor F 8 29 1 Cassette paper sensor 2 Pickup roller roller A 3 Feed roller roller B 4 Separation roller rolle...

Page 390: ... with the cassette size dial In the absence of a cassette all 4 actuators are off causing the machine to assume there is no cassette AB Inch Switch The cassette size dial is equipped with a switch operated to change between AB and Inch configurations the cassette size detecting switch will detect the configuration as soon as a cassette is fitted in the machine Print Start Cassette 1 pickup motor M...

Page 391: ...ize SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 no cassette OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF A5R ON OFF ON ON OFF A4 ON ON ON ON OFF A4R OFF ON ON ON OFF A3 OFF ON OFF ON OFF B5 ON ON OFF ON OFF B5R OFF OFF OFF ON OFF B4 ON OFF OFF ON OFF U1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF U2 OFF ON ON OFF OFF Envelope ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 2 SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 INCH SW4 ON INCH 1 ...

Page 392: ... is detected an envelope cassette must be fitted Inch configuration Size SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 no cassette OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF STMTR ON OFF ON ON ON LTR ON ON ON ON ON LTRR OFF ON ON ON ON LGL OFF ON OFF ON ON 11X17 ON ON OFF ON ON EXEC OFF OFF OFF ON ON U3 OFF ON OFF OFF ON U4 OFF ON ON OFF ON Envelope ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB Inch configuration switch The mach...

Page 393: ... Paper Level Sensor 0007 8702 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The level of paper inside the cassette is checked using the following sensors T 8 12 U1 G LTR U2 FLSC U3 G LGL U4 A LTR Universal U1 Through U4 Size FLSC OFI E OFI B OFI A OFI M OFI FOLI A FLS G LTR G LGL A LTR LTR A LTRR LTRR Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Paper level sensor A PS3 PS5 ...

Page 394: ...ssette paper sensor 3 Lifter clutch 4 Cassette paper level sensor A 5 Cassette paper level sensor B 6 Paper level sensor flag 7 Lifter gear 8 Tray Paper level sensor B PS4 PS6 Paper sensor PS1 PS2 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 395: ...l with paper Paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A When there is little paper OFF ON When half full with paper Paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A Paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A When there is no paper Paper tray Cassette paper sensor Flag ON ON View from the Front of the Machine ...

Page 396: ...ON OFF OFF 50 to 50 sheets approx ON ON OFF 50 sheets or less approx ON No paper Paper level sensor A Paper level sensor B Paper sensor Paper level Control panel indication ...

Page 397: ...o the machine 1 the pickup guide plate is locked in place at all times and does not require drive for pickup operation 2 multi pickup roller is driven by the main motor M2 through the manual feed pickup clutch CL1 F 8 34 1 Upper guide 2 Stopper plate 3 Side guide 4 Manual feed pickup tray 5 Pressure spring 6 Holding plate 7 Manual feed paper sensor flag 8 Separation pad 9 Manual feed pickup roller...

Page 398: ...e again goes on to pick up paper The manual feed pickup clutch CL1 goes off immediately before the trailing edge of paper moves past the manual feed pickup roller thereafter the registration roller serves to pull off the paper F 8 35 8 5 3 Identifying the Paper Size 0007 2187 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The width of paper is detected with reference to the output of the variable resistor SVR1 which...

Page 399: ...ed when paper is set between it and the manual feed pickup roller It is linked to the upper guide so that it opens when the user opens the guide to prevent the user from placing paper without opening the upper guide the guide is equipped with a stopper plate 1 When the upper guide is closed the holding plate is locked in place and the stopper plate prevents the user from placing paper F 8 37 2 Whe...

Page 400: ...Chapter 8 8 44 F 8 38 3 When the upper guide is closed once again the holding plate becomes locked in position once again F 8 39 ...

Page 401: ...0 The machine does not have a mechanism to check horizontal registration for both 1st and 2nd sides of a print The point of horizontal registration for the 2nd side may be adjusted in service mode i e the image write start position The degree of arching for registration on the 2nd side of a double sided print must be adjusted separately from the adjustment for the 1st side to accommodate the fact ...

Page 402: ...e of double sided prints Reference small size A4 B5 and the like whose side in paper feed direction is shorter than that of LTR Large size A3 A4R B5R and the like whose side in feed direction is longer than that of LTR The term 2nd side of a double sided print as used in relation to the machine s service mode refers to the side that receives an image second in order in other words it corresponds t...

Page 403: ...ing depending on whether or not the machine is equipped with a delivery accessory If a delivery accessory is present the reversing rollers are used to turn over the sheet If no delivery accessory is present the delivery rollers are used to turn over the sheet 3 Way Unit A1 Configuration of Components If Without a Delivery Accessory F 8 41 1 Delivery roller 2 Delivery sensor 1 PS14 3 Reversing flap...

Page 404: ...ng roller 2 Reversal sensor PS4A 3 Duplexing inlet sensor PS3A 4 Duplexing inlet roller 5 Duplexing feeding roller 1 6 Duplexing feed sensor PS17 7 Duplexing feeding roller 2 8 7 2 Overview 0007 2221 iR3570 iR4570 Inside the duplexing assembly are 2 sets of rollers that are driven by the duplexing motor M10 6 3 2 1 4 5 7 ...

Page 405: ...Duplexing inlet roller 5 Duplexing feeding roller 1 6 Duplexing feed sensor PS17 7 Duplexing feeding roller 2 8 7 3 Sequence of Image Formation 0007 2223 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The machine goes thorough the following sequence to form images when making double sided copies prints 6 3 2 1 4 5 7 ...

Page 406: ...eets A4 LTR 5 sheets A4 LTR 6 sheets A3 LDR 3 sheets 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 4 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 2 3 1 4 1 5 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 2 3 1 4 1 6 2 5 1 6 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 A4 LTR 4 sheets A4 LTR 5 sheets A4 LTR 6 sheets A3 LDR 3 sheets 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 4 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 2 3 1 4 1 5 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 2 3 1 4 1 6 2 5 1 6 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2...

Page 407: ... 5 sheets indicates the 1st side of the 1st sheet indicates the 2nd side of the 1st sheet 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 3 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 A4 LTR 4 sheets A4 LTR 5 sheets A4 LTR 6 sheets A3 LDR 3 sheets 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 4 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 2 3 1 4 1 5 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 2 3 1 4 1 6 2 5 1 6 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 3 1 5 sheets indicates the 1st side of the 1st she...

Page 408: ...07 3125 iR2270 iR2870 A4 LTR 5 Sheets A number in a circle indicates the 1st side while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side F 8 49 The 1st sheet is picked up F 8 50 An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is picked up 1 1 2 ...

Page 409: ...r and moved to duplexing registration An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet F 8 52 The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration The 3rd sheet is picked up 1 2 3 2 1 ...

Page 410: ...eet and for the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 54 The 1st sheet is delivered The 3rd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again The 4th sheet is picked up 1 2 3 1 4 3 2 1 ...

Page 411: ...t and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 56 The 2nd sheet is delivered The 4th sheet is reversed and is moved for duplexing registration The 3rd sheet is picked for registration once again The 5th sheet is picked up 3 4 2 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 ...

Page 412: ...de of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet The 4th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 58 The 3rd sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is turned over and moved for registration The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again 2 1 4 3 3 5 3 5 4 2 1 ...

Page 413: ... 59 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 60 The 4th sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again F 8 61 3 2 1 4 4 5 5 3 4 2 1 3 4 2 1 5 5 ...

Page 414: ... 8 62 The 5th sheet is delivered 8 7 6 Flow of Paper w delivery option 0007 3126 iR2270 iR2870 A4 LTR 5 Sheets Delivery to Tray 1 2 A number in a circle indicates the 1st side while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side F 8 63 The 1st sheet is picked up 3 2 1 4 5 1 ...

Page 415: ...image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is picked up F 8 65 The 1st sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet F 8 66 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 416: ...eet is picked up F 8 67 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 68 The 1st sheet is delivered The 3rd sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again The 4th sheet is picked up 1 3 1 2 4 2 1 3 ...

Page 417: ... and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 70 The 2nd sheet is delivered The 4th sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 3rd sheet is moved for registration once again The 5th sheet is picked up 2 3 2 4 1 5 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 418: ...he 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 72 The 3rd sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again 3 5 4 3 1 2 3 1 2 4 5 ...

Page 419: ... 73 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 74 The 4th sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again F 8 75 4 4 1 2 3 5 4 1 2 3 5 5 4 1 2 3 5 ...

Page 420: ...h sheet F 8 76 The 5th sheet is delivered 8 7 7 Flow of Paper 0007 3407 iR3570 iR4570 A4 LTR 5 Sheets Delivery to Tray 1 2 A number in a circle indicates the 1st side while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side F 8 77 The 1st sheet is picked up 4 1 2 3 5 1 ...

Page 421: ...image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is picked up F 8 79 The 1st sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet F 8 80 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 422: ...eet is picked up F 8 81 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 82 The 1st sheet is delivered The 3rd sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again The 4th sheet is picked up 1 3 1 2 4 2 1 3 ...

Page 423: ... and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 84 The 2nd sheet is delivered The 4th sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 3rd sheet is moved for registration once again The 5th sheet is picked up 2 3 2 4 1 5 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 424: ...he 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 86 The 3rd sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again 3 5 4 3 1 2 3 1 2 4 5 ...

Page 425: ... 87 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 88 The 4th sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again F 8 89 4 4 1 2 3 5 4 1 2 3 5 5 4 1 2 3 5 ...

Page 426: ...Chapter 8 8 70 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet F 8 90 The 5th sheet is delivered 4 1 2 3 5 ...

Page 427: ...right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 91 8 8 1 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6552 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 92 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 93 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 94 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the ...

Page 428: ...hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 97 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 1 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7329 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 98 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right doo...

Page 429: ... the Right Cover lower front 0007 6553 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 101 8 8 1 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6554 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 t...

Page 430: ...g the Right Cover lower front 0007 6556 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 105 8 8 2 3 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 0007 6557 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and...

Page 431: ... separation roller 3 F 8 107 Point to Note When Replacing the Feed Separation Roller 1 The collar roller core of the machine s feed separation roller is black 8 8 4 Sensor Mount 8 8 4 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6558 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach...

Page 432: ... 111 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 112 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 113 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate ...

Page 433: ...or 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 116 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 117 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 4 4 Removing the ...

Page 434: ...m the 2 wire saddles 2 and the 2 clamps 3 F 8 119 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and take out the pickup unit 1 2 F 8 120 8 8 4 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 0007 6565 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness from the guide then remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 121 8 8 4 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting ...

Page 435: ...2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Take care not to orient the pickup unit facing down when mounting the sensor base otherwise the gears will fall out 1 After fitting the bushing 1 to the frame mount the gear shaft 2 F 8 125 2 Fit the 6 points A indicated in the figure in the holes of the base then mount the sensor base 2 using 4 screws 1 F 8 126 3 Mount the gear 1 and the E ring 2 Be sure not to le...

Page 436: ... then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 8 128 8 8 5 2 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6988 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F...

Page 437: ...onnectors 1 F 8 132 4 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the pickup motor base 2 F 8 133 8 8 5 4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 1 0007 6578 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws and detach the cassette pickup motor 1 2 F 8 134 8 8 6 Cassette Pick up Motor 2 8 8 6 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6598 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other ...

Page 438: ... the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 136 8 8 6 3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base 0007 6990 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Free the harness 1 from the 2 wire saddles 2 F 8 137 2 Remove the 5 screws 1 Remove the power cord base 2 F 8 138 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 3...

Page 439: ...70 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the cassette pickup motor 2 2 F 8 141 8 8 7 Cassette Size Sensor 8 8 7 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6602 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 142 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 440: ...on delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 145 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 146 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 147 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on...

Page 441: ...or 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 150 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 151 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 7 4 Removing the ...

Page 442: ...1 and free the harness from the guide then remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 153 8 8 7 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6609 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 then free the harness from the 2 wire saddles 2 and the 2 clamps 3 F 8 154 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and take out the pickup unit 1 2 F 8 155 8 8 7 7...

Page 443: ...ps 3 in the case of the size sensor 2 the 4 clamps 3 and 4 F 8 157 4 Remove the screw 1 and detach the cassette size sensor together with the PCB 2 in the case of the size sensor 1 together with the size sensor 2 in the case of the size sensor 2 remove the sensor on its own F 8 158 5 Detach the cover 1 from the PCB F 8 159 6 Detach the size sensor 1 from the PCB F 8 160 8 8 8 Cassette Retry Paper ...

Page 444: ...e Right Door 0007 6612 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 162 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 163 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 164 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 165 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3...

Page 445: ...hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 8 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7337 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 168 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 169 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 fo...

Page 446: ...door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 171 8 8 8 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6614 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect that 3 connectors 1 then free the harness from the 2 wire saddles 2 and the 2 clamps 3 F 8 172 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 a...

Page 447: ... pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 174 8 8 8 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 0008 1508 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 TP screws 1 and the binding screw 2 from the rear of the pickup assembly and detach the bracket 3 F 8 175 Pickup Unit 1 F 8 176 Pickup Unit 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw then detach the cassette pickup solenoid 3 3 Remove the bushing and the 5 sc...

Page 448: ...ensor 8 8 9 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6618 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 179 8 8 9 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6658 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 180 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plat...

Page 449: ...5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 184 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 185 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 9 3 Removing the Right Door 00...

Page 450: ...the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 188 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 9 4 Removing the Right Cover lower front 0007 6620 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right do...

Page 451: ...he pickup unit 1 2 F 8 191 8 8 9 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 0007 6624 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness from the guide then remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 192 8 8 9 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 0007 6625 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 TP screws 1 and the bi...

Page 452: ...emoving the Cassette Paper Sensor 0007 6626 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the cassette paper sensor 2 F 8 196 8 8 10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor A B 8 8 10 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6627 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 sc...

Page 453: ...e the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 199 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 200 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 201 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 454: ...hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 10 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7340 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 204 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 205 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 f...

Page 455: ...door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 207 8 8 10 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6634 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 then free the harness from the 2 wire saddles 2 and the 2 clamps 3 F 8 208 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 a...

Page 456: ... pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 210 8 8 10 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 0007 6637 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 TP screws 1 and the binding screw 2 from the rear of the pickup assembly and detach the bracket 3 F 8 211 Pickup Unit 1 F 8 212 Pickup Unit 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw then detach the cassette pickup solenoid 3 3 Remove the bushing and the 5 s...

Page 457: ...de Resistor 8 8 11 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6641 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 215 8 8 11 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6657 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 216 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fix...

Page 458: ...5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 220 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 221 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 11 3 Removing the Right Door 0...

Page 459: ... the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 224 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 11 4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0007 6644 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the manual upper guide link 1 plastic E ring 2 and boss 3 F 8 225 2 Remove ...

Page 460: ...ct the connector 1 5 Remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the manual feed unit 3 F 8 228 F 8 229 8 8 11 5 Removing the Manual Tray Unit 0007 6648 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the tie wrap 2 F 8 230 3 Remove the manual feed tray unit 3 F 8 231 ...

Page 461: ...e resistor 1 connector 2 F 8 233 8 8 12 Cassette Pickup Solenoid 8 8 12 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6652 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 234 8 8 12 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6654 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right...

Page 462: ...5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 239 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 240 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 12 3 Removing the Right Door 0...

Page 463: ...the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 243 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 12 4 Removing the Right Cover lower front 0007 6659 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right d...

Page 464: ...e out the pickup unit 1 2 F 8 246 8 8 12 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 0007 6662 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness from the guide then remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 247 8 8 12 7 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid 0007 6664 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connecto...

Page 465: ...right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 249 8 8 13 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6668 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 250 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 251 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 252 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove...

Page 466: ...e the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 255 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 13 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7347 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 256 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the ...

Page 467: ...g the Right Cover lower front 0007 6669 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 259 8 8 13 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6670 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1...

Page 468: ...Removing the Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB 0007 6672 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the PCB cover 1 snap on F 8 263 2 Remove the cassette size sensor relay PCB 2 3 connectors 2 2 clamps 3 F 8 264 8 8 14 Manual Tray Assembly 8 8 14 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6697 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 O...

Page 469: ...ve the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 267 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 268 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 269 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 470: ...hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 14 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7348 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 272 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 273 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 f...

Page 471: ...e Manual Feed Unit 0007 6699 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the manual upper guide link 1 plastic E ring 2 and boss 3 F 8 275 2 Remove the screw 2 and detach the manual feed guide 1 F 8 276 3 Remove the connector cover 1 snap on F 8 277 4 Disconnect the connector 1 5 Remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the manual feed unit 3 F 8 278 ...

Page 472: ...eed tray unit 3 F 8 281 8 8 15 Manual Feed Unit 8 8 15 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6705 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 282 8 8 15 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6707 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4...

Page 473: ... 285 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 286 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 287 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate ...

Page 474: ...nector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 290 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 291 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 15 4 Removing...

Page 475: ...p on F 8 294 4 Disconnect the connector 1 5 Remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the manual feed unit 3 F 8 295 F 8 296 8 8 16 Manual Pickup Roller 8 8 16 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6709 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 ...

Page 476: ...ve the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 299 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 300 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 301 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 477: ...hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 16 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7354 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 304 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 305 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 f...

Page 478: ...e Manual Feed Unit 0007 6994 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the manual upper guide link 1 plastic E ring 2 and boss 3 F 8 307 2 Remove the screw 2 and detach the manual feed guide 1 F 8 308 3 Remove the connector cover 1 snap on F 8 309 4 Disconnect the connector 1 5 Remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the manual feed unit 3 F 8 310 ...

Page 479: ...lastic E ring 4 and detach the manual feed pickup roller from shaft Take care not to drop the parallel pin F 8 313 8 8 17 Manual Pick up Clutch 8 8 17 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6675 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 314 8...

Page 480: ...ht door F 8 317 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 318 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 319 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate ...

Page 481: ...connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 322 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 323 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 17 4 Remov...

Page 482: ... iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 4 fastons 1 and detach the main power switch 2 snap on type F 8 325 When connecting the 4 fastons be sure that they are located as indicated by their specific location numbers F 8 326 8 8 17 6 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Clutch 0007 6681 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector 2P 1 2 Free the clutch cable 2 from the wire saddle 3 3 Remov...

Page 483: ...70 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 329 8 8 18 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6715 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 330 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 484: ...5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 334 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 335 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 18 3 Removing the Right Door 0...

Page 485: ... the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 338 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 18 4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0007 6716 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the manual upper guide link 1 plastic E ring 2 and boss 3 F 8 339 2 Remove ...

Page 486: ...2 F 8 343 8 8 18 5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller 0007 6717 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the manual feed upper cover 1 snap on F 8 344 2 Remove the bush 2 and detach the manual feed pickup roller 3 together with the shaft 3 Remove the plastic E ring 4 and detach the manual feed pickup roller from shaft Take care not to drop the parallel pin ...

Page 487: ...2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 8 347 8 8 19 2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007 6733 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the wire saddle F 8 348 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 and deta...

Page 488: ...d in place 8 8 19 3 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007 7530 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Disconnect the 6 connectors 1 2 Free the cable from the 6 cable clamps 2 3 Remove the re use band 3 F 8 350 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the main drive assembly 2 F 8 351 ...

Page 489: ...Slide out the cassette 2 Open the right door in the case of the separation roller 3 Pick the tabs of the individual rollers and detach the pickup roller 1 feed roller 2 and separation roller 3 F 8 353 Point to Note When Replacing the Feed Separation Roller 1 The collar roller core of the machine s feed separation roller is black 8 8 21 Vertical Path Roller 8 8 21 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 00...

Page 490: ...ve the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 356 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 357 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 358 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 491: ...hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 21 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7359 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 361 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 362 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 f...

Page 492: ... door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 364 8 8 21 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6740 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 then free the harness from the 2 wire saddles 2 and the 2 clamps 3 F 8 365 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 ...

Page 493: ... pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 367 8 8 21 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 0007 6742 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 TP screws 1 and the binding screw 2 from the rear of the pickup assembly and detach the bracket 3 F 8 368 Pickup Unit 1 F 8 369 Pickup Unit 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw then detach the cassette pickup solenoid 3 3 Remove the bushing and the 5 s...

Page 494: ...e vertical path roller 2 to detach F 8 372 8 8 22 Duplex Feed Roller 2 8 8 22 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6744 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 373 8 8 22 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6746 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the...

Page 495: ...5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 378 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 379 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 22 3 Removing the Right Door 0...

Page 496: ...e lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 382 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 22 4 Removing the Duplex Feed Roller 2 0007 6748 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Free the coil spring 1 and at the same time remove the E ring 2 to pull out the shaft 3 then detach the ...

Page 497: ...7 6750 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 386 8 8 23 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6751 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 8 387 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 498: ...5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 391 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 392 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 23 3 Removing the Right Door 0...

Page 499: ...tom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 395 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 23 4 Removing the Duplex Feed Sensor 0007 6976 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws w collar 1 and detach the transfer frame 2 F 8 396 2 D...

Page 500: ...her screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 8 398 8 8 24 2 Removing the Duplex Feed Clutch 0007 7325 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the clutch fixing plate 3 F 8 399 2 Remove the duplex feed clutch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 ...

Page 501: ...ht cover rear 4 F 8 401 8 8 25 2 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 6763 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the front cover 1 F 8 402 2 Remove the face cover rubber 1 3 Remove the binding screw 2 4 Remove the RS tightening screw 3 5 Detach the front cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 8 403 8 8 25 3 Removing the Delivery Tray 0007 6765 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR353...

Page 502: ...tension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 407 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 408 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 409 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook fou...

Page 503: ... connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 412 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 413 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 25 6 Remo...

Page 504: ... from the machine terminal F 8 415 4 Open the Extension Delivery Kit 1 5 Remove the 2 screws 3 6 Remove the 2 screws 2 and close the Extension Delivery Kit F 8 416 7 Pull out the Extension Delivery Kit 1 from the machine F 8 417 8 8 25 7 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1 0007 6776 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the delivery assembly 1 1 3 screws 2 2 stepped screws on the left F 8 418 ...

Page 505: ...ght cover rear 4 F 8 419 8 8 26 2 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 6781 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the front cover 1 F 8 420 2 Remove the face cover rubber 1 3 Remove the binding screw 2 4 Remove the RS tightening screw 3 5 Detach the front cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 8 421 8 8 26 3 Removing the Delivery Tray 0007 6783 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR35...

Page 506: ...tension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 425 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 426 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 427 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook fou...

Page 507: ...ctor 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 430 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 431 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 26 6 Removing t...

Page 508: ...4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 8 433 2 Disconcert the 3 connectors 1 F 8 434 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 8 435 4 Detach the fixing unit 1 toward the front F 8 436 When mounting the harness cover 1 be sure to keep the harness 2 within the space 3 indicated in the figure so that the harness 2 will not come into contact with the gear 4 ...

Page 509: ...ement of the fixing assembly F 8 438 8 8 26 8 Removing the Fixing Delivery Drive Assembly 0007 6792 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 8 439 2 Disconnect the connector 1 of the harness and free the harness from the cable clamp 2 F 8 440 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the fixing delivery drive assembly 1 2 F 8 441 ...

Page 510: ...570 iR3530 1 Slide out the cassette 2 Open the right door in the case of the separation roller 3 Pick the tabs of the individual rollers and detach the pickup roller 1 feed roller 2 and separation roller 3 F 8 442 Point to Note When Replacing the Feed Separation Roller 1 The collar roller core of the machine s feed separation roller is black ...

Page 511: ...Chapter 9 Fixing System ...

Page 512: ......

Page 513: ... 3 2 7 Temperature Control in Response to Change of Paper Size 9 7 9 3 3 Cleaning 9 7 9 3 3 1 Fixing Film Cleaning 9 7 9 3 4 Detecting the Passage of Paper 9 8 9 3 4 1 Detecting the Passage of Paper 9 8 9 4 Protective Functions 9 9 9 4 1 Protective Functions 9 9 9 4 2 Detecting an Error 9 10 9 5 Parts Replacement Procedure 9 12 9 5 1 Fixing Unit 9 12 9 5 1 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 9 12 9 5 ...

Page 514: ...y Sensor 9 46 9 5 5 1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit 9 46 9 5 5 2 Removing the Grounding Plate 9 50 9 5 5 3 Removing the Fixing Film Cover 9 50 9 5 5 4 Removing the Left Side Plate 9 52 9 5 5 5 Releasing the Locking Plate 9 53 9 5 5 6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit 9 54 9 5 5 7 Removing the Inside Delivery Sensor 9 57 9 5 6 Fixing Film Sensor 9 57 9 5 6 1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover...

Page 515: ...nts 0006 6003 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The machine s fixing system has the following major components Item Description Fixing method by fixing film pressure roller Fixing heater plate type heater Control temperature 180 deg C at PSTBY Fixing drive control by control of fixing film speed Fixing temperature detection by main thermistor Protective mechanism by sub thermistor Cleaning method...

Page 516: ...Chapter 9 9 2 F 9 1 1 Fixing heater 2 Fixing film unit 3 Pressure roller 4 Power supply brush 5 Film sensor 6 Delivery roller 7 Fixing inside delivery sensor flag 8 Cleaning roller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 517: ...2 speed and then to normal speed 2 Performs the start up current control 3 Starts measuring the time passed after the machine reaches the target temperature T deg C Target temperature T deg C 200 deg C iR3570 iR4570 190 deg C iR2270 iR2870 4 Starts feeding in the case of printing in plain paper mode 5 Starts feeding when 5 sec have passed after the machine reached the target temperature in the cas...

Page 518: ... iR4570 iR3530 The rotation cycle of the fixing film is monitored to control the fixing motor to a specific speed When the fixing film rotates and as a result the reflecting member positioned in the loop of the film approaches the speed sensor the machine detects the rotation of the fixing film F 9 2 1 Speed sensor 2 Reflecting member 3 Fixing film driven by fixing motor 4 Pressure roller A Paper ...

Page 519: ...ick paper mode the feeding timing is not changed even if the environment sensor detection temperature is 13 deg C or less 9 3 2 3 Controlling the Power Supply at Start Up 0006 6583 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 When the thermistor detection temperature is 180 deg C or less the power control to compensate for the heater varying according to input voltage and a heater resistor value is performe...

Page 520: ...s higher than the target control temperature for a specific period of time 0 6 sec the machine will decrease the power ratio if lower it will increase the power rate 9 3 2 5 Changing the Fixing Film Control Temperature 0007 5452 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 When a fixing failure occurs or creases appear the fixing film control temperature can be changed in the service mode as shown below COP...

Page 521: ...9 3 3 Cleaning 9 3 3 1 Fixing Film Cleaning 0007 5300 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Purpose In the event of a jam or when wear on the fixing film advances the fixing film is rotated idly for collection of toner from both the film and the pressure roller to the cleaning roller The timing of control is as follows 1 If the reading of the cleaning counter has exceeded the interval expressed in te...

Page 522: ...R3570 iR4570 iR3530 The paper passage detection configuration in the fixing unit is shown below F 9 4 When a delay jam of the fixing delivery sensor PS13 occurs the fixing motor is stopped immediately so as to prevent paper from wrapping around the fixing roller The pressure of the fixing film and the pressure roller is released when a jam occurs so that jammed paper can be taken out easily DC con...

Page 523: ...he triac and the relay are turned off The thermo switch is turned off 2 When the CPU goes out of control The latch circuit detects the excessive temperature rise and the relay is turned off The thermo switch is turned off 3 When the triac short circuits Software detects failure and the relay is turned off The latch circuit detects the excessive temperature rise and the relay is turned off The ther...

Page 524: ...tects overheating A hardware circuit detects overheating in relation to the thermistor main or sub 0002 The sub thermistor detects overheating The thermistor detects 295 deg C or more for 200 msec or more continuously E002 0000 The fixing temperature fails to reach a specific level In the course of start up control the thermistor detects a temperature lower then 115 deg C for 200 msec continuously...

Page 525: ...100 deg C with the fixing motor in a locked state and in addition the machine fails to detect the marker signal for 6 sec E014 0000 The machine detects a fixing motor error During operation the machine detects an overload condition continuously for 3 sec or more Error code Detail code Symptom Description ...

Page 526: ...right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 9 6 9 5 1 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 7879 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 9 7 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 9 8 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 9 9 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 sc...

Page 527: ...hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 9 12 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 9 5 1 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7882 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 9 13 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right doo...

Page 528: ...e hook found on the side plate F 9 15 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 9 5 1 4 Removing the Fixing Unit 0007 7884 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 9 16 2 Disconcert the 3 connectors 1 F 9 17 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 9 18 4 Detach the fixing unit 1 toward the front ...

Page 529: ...sitating the replacement of the fixing assembly F 9 21 9 5 2 Pressure Roller 9 5 2 1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit 0007 7910 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 and the stepped screw 2 and detach the inside delivery cover unit 3 F 9 22 Note 1 Point to note when removing the inside delivery cover unit Remove the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide 1 i...

Page 530: ...der mount 1 At this time hook the edge of the torsion spring on the area A of the duplexing support feeder mount F 9 24 2 Attach the guide 1 to the duplexing support feeder mount 2 At this time fit b into a and d into c Make sure that the edge e of the torsion spring is outside the guide F 9 25 3 Hook the edge 1 of the torsion spring on the spring hook area 2 of the inside delivery cover 1 2 A 1 1...

Page 531: ...direction B Opening the guide can prevent it from coming off the inside delivery cover unit After attaching make sure that the guide 1 rotates smoothly F 9 27 2 Attach the screw 1 and the stepped screw 2 and fix the inside delivery cover unit 3 F 9 28 9 5 2 2 Removing the Grounding Plate 0007 7911 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the grounding plate 2 1 2 ...

Page 532: ...hen detach the fixing film cover 3 F 9 30 F 9 31 When mounting the fixing film cover unit be sure to check that it has not ridden over the emboss 1 indicated by the arrow in the figure before tightening the screw F 9 32 F 9 33 9 5 2 4 Removing the Left Side Plate 0007 7913 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the left side plate cover 2 ...

Page 533: ...nting the left side plate be sure that it is correctly positioned so that the locking lever and the teeth are correctly engaged See the figure F 9 38 9 5 2 5 Releasing the Locking Plate 0007 7914 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Turn the locking gear 1 in the direction of the arrow to release the locking roller F 9 39 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 ...

Page 534: ...embly F 9 41 3 Turn the locking plate 1 in the direction of the arrow to release it F 9 42 9 5 2 6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit 0007 7915 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 While pushing down the release lever front 1 pull out the heater contact 2 F 9 43 2 While pushing down the release lever rear 1 pull out the heater contact 2 F 9 44 3 Remove the screw 1 and free the AC harness 2 F 9 45 4 Fre...

Page 535: ...relay connector 1 F 9 48 7 Remove the fixing film unit 1 F 9 49 9 5 2 7 Removing the Inlet Guide 0007 7916 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Slide the inlet guide 1 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 9 50 9 5 2 8 Removing the Pressure Roller 0007 7918 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the E ring 1 and detach the drive gear 2 ...

Page 536: ...n detach the pressure roller F 9 53 Be sure to pay attention to the position and the orientation of the insulating bush F 9 54 The insulating bush may be of 2 different shapes one for the iR3570 4570 and the other for the iR2270 2870 If the machine is an iR2270 2870 be sure to pay attention to the direction of the protrusion of the insulating bush F 9 55 ...

Page 537: ...ng it in the arrow direction B in the figure Otherwise the guide may come off the inside delivery cover unit F 9 57 Note 2 Procedure for attaching the guide Perform the following steps if the guide has come off the inside delivery cover unit 1 Attach the torsion spring 2 to the duplexing support feeder mount 1 At this time hook the edge of the torsion spring on the area A of the duplexing support ...

Page 538: ...ching the inside delivery cover unit 1 Attach the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide 1 in the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B Opening the guide can prevent it from coming off the inside delivery cover unit After attaching make sure that the guide 1 rotates smoothly 1 1 c e d 2 b a 2 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 539: ...he cleaning roller holder 2 F 9 63 2 Remove the cleaning roller holder 1 F 9 64 The foregoing steps assume that the fixing unit has already been removed from the machine The cleaning roller may also be removed without first removing the fixing unit from the machine in the same way 9 5 4 Fixing Film 9 5 4 1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit 0007 7898 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remov...

Page 540: ...r unit F 9 66 Note 2 Procedure for attaching the guide Perform the following steps if the guide has come off the inside delivery cover unit 1 Attach the torsion spring 2 to the duplexing support feeder mount 1 At this time hook the edge of the torsion spring on the area A of the duplexing support feeder mount F 9 67 2 Attach the guide 1 to the duplexing support feeder mount 2 At this time fit b in...

Page 541: ...ching the inside delivery cover unit 1 Attach the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide 1 in the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B Opening the guide can prevent it from coming off the inside delivery cover unit After attaching make sure that the guide 1 rotates smoothly 1 1 c e d 2 b a 2 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 542: ...e 2 screws 1 and detach the grounding plate 2 F 9 72 9 5 4 3 Removing the Fixing Film Cover 0007 7900 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and remove the self tapping screw 2 then detach the fixing film cover 3 F 9 73 F 9 74 When mounting the fixing film cover unit be sure to check that it has not ridden over the emboss 1 indicated by the arrow in the figure before tightening...

Page 543: ... the Left Side Plate 0007 7901 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the left side plate cover 2 F 9 77 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 9 78 3 Slide the left side plate 1 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 9 79 F 9 80 ...

Page 544: ...4570 iR3530 1 Turn the locking gear 1 in the direction of the arrow to release the locking roller F 9 82 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 9 83 Do not touch the screw 1 used to keep the fixing assembly in place Turning the screw will change the pressure of the fixing assembly which cannot be adjusted in the field necessitating the replacement of the fixing assembly F 9 84 3 Turn the locking plate 1 in the...

Page 545: ...F 9 86 2 While pushing down the release lever rear 1 pull out the heater contact 2 F 9 87 3 Remove the screw 1 and free the AC harness 2 F 9 88 4 Free the AC harness 1 from the edge saddle 2 F 9 89 5 Free the relay connector 1 of the signal cable from the connector holder 2 F 9 90 6 Disconnect the connector 2 from the relay connector 1 F 9 91 7 Remove the fixing film unit 1 ...

Page 546: ...nd opening it in the arrow direction B in the figure Otherwise the guide may come off the inside delivery cover unit F 9 94 Note 2 Procedure for attaching the guide Perform the following steps if the guide has come off the inside delivery cover unit 1 Attach the torsion spring 2 to the duplexing support feeder mount 1 At this time hook the edge of the torsion spring on the area A of the duplexing ...

Page 547: ...ching the inside delivery cover unit 1 Attach the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide 1 in the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B Opening the guide can prevent it from coming off the inside delivery cover unit After attaching make sure that the guide 1 rotates smoothly 1 1 c e d 2 b a 2 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 548: ...2 screws 1 and detach the grounding plate 2 F 9 100 9 5 5 3 Removing the Fixing Film Cover 0007 7925 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and remove the self tapping screw 2 then detach the fixing film cover 3 F 9 101 F 9 102 When mounting the fixing film cover unit be sure to check that it has not ridden over the emboss 1 indicated by the arrow in the figure before tightenin...

Page 549: ...the Left Side Plate 0007 7926 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the left side plate cover 2 F 9 105 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 9 106 3 Slide the left side plate 1 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 9 107 F 9 108 ...

Page 550: ...70 iR3530 1 Turn the locking gear 1 in the direction of the arrow to release the locking roller F 9 110 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 9 111 Do not touch the screw 1 used to keep the fixing assembly in place Turning the screw will change the pressure of the fixing assembly which cannot be adjusted in the field necessitating the replacement of the fixing assembly F 9 112 3 Turn the locking plate 1 in th...

Page 551: ... 114 2 While pushing down the release lever rear 1 pull out the heater contact 2 F 9 115 3 Remove the screw 1 and free the AC harness 2 F 9 116 4 Free the AC harness 1 from the edge saddle 2 F 9 117 5 Free the relay connector 1 of the signal cable from the connector holder 2 F 9 118 6 Disconnect the connector 2 from the relay connector 1 F 9 119 7 Remove the fixing film unit 1 ...

Page 552: ... Film Sensor 9 5 6 1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit 0007 7895 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 and the stepped screw 2 and detach the inside delivery cover unit 3 F 9 123 Note 1 Point to note when removing the inside delivery cover unit Remove the inside delivery cover unit while supporting the guide 1 in the arrow direction A and opening it in the arrow direction B...

Page 553: ...1 At this time hook the edge of the torsion spring on the area A of the duplexing support feeder mount F 9 125 2 Attach the guide 1 to the duplexing support feeder mount 2 At this time fit b into a and d into c Make sure that the edge e of the torsion spring is outside the guide F 9 126 3 Hook the edge 1 of the torsion spring on the spring hook area 2 of the inside delivery cover 1 2 A 1 1 c e d 2...

Page 554: ...irection B Opening the guide can prevent it from coming off the inside delivery cover unit After attaching make sure that the guide 1 rotates smoothly F 9 128 2 Attach the screw 1 and the stepped screw 2 and fix the inside delivery cover unit 3 F 9 129 9 5 6 2 Removing the Grounding Plate 0007 7896 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the grounding plate 2 1 2 ...

Page 555: ... 3 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor 0007 7897 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 F 9 131 2 Detach the harness 1 from the guide 2 F 9 132 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the fixing film sensor 2 F 9 133 ...

Page 556: ......

Page 557: ...Chapter 10 External and Controls ...

Page 558: ......

Page 559: ... Unit 10 12 10 4 1 5 Connections to Various Accessories 10 13 10 4 1 6 Connections to Various Accessories 10 14 10 4 2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB 10 15 10 4 2 1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB 10 15 10 4 2 2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB 10 15 10 4 2 3 Rated Output of the Accessories Power Supply PCB 10 16 10 4 2 4 Rated Output of the All Night Powe...

Page 560: ... 10 44 10 5 6 6 Removing the Control Panel Frame 10 44 10 5 6 7 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB 10 47 10 5 7 Control Panel Key Switch PCB 10 47 10 5 7 1 Removing the Control Panel 10 47 10 5 7 2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover 10 49 10 5 7 3 Removing the Control Panel Frame 10 50 10 5 7 4 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB 10 50 10 5 7 5 Removing the Control Panel 10 51 10 5 7...

Page 561: ... rear 10 83 10 5 12 13 Removing the Right Door 10 84 10 5 12 14 Removing the Right Door 10 86 10 5 12 15 Removing the Right Door 10 88 10 5 12 16 Removing the Fixing Unit 10 89 10 5 12 17 Removing the Gear 10 92 10 5 12 18 Removing the High Voltage PCB 10 93 10 5 13 Exhaust Fan 10 94 10 5 13 1 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan 10 94 10 5 13 2 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan 10 95 10 5 14 Motor of Ma...

Page 562: ......

Page 563: ...dware key input F 10 1 10 1 2 Overview 0006 6163 iR3530 The machine s control panel consists of the following PCBs LCD and touch panel The major functions of the control panel are as follows LCD indication contrast adjustment touch switch input hardware key input Main controller PCB Control panel CPU PCB Touch panel Color LCD Keypad PCB Control panel inverter PCB J1018A J1018B J2117A J2117B J1114 ...

Page 564: ...s instructed by the program The data is sent through the control panel PCB to reach the LCD 10 1 5 Adjustment of the LCD Contact 0006 6161 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The machine is equipped with a density adjustment volume VR6801 on its keypad PCB for use by the user to adjust the contrast of the LCD screen 10 1 6 Adjustment of the LCD Contact 0006 6165 iR3530 J1121 J955 J956 J1120 J1116 J1117 16...

Page 565: ...ontroller PCB Controlling the Buzzer Sound Controlling the Control Panel LED Memo the color LCD is driven by the main controller and the control panel CPU PCB serves to relay the drive signals 10 1 8 Functions of the Control Panel CPU 0006 6166 iR3530 Monitoring the Key Inputs It communicates the keypad and function key inputs to the CPU on the main controller PCB Monitoring the Touch Panel Input ...

Page 566: ...6 Japan 1 total 1 not indicated not indicated not indicated not indicated not indicated 101 000 000 000 000 000 Japan 1 total 2 copy total 2 total A total 2 not indicated not indicated not indicated 102 202 127 000 000 000 120VTW 2 total 1 total large copy total 1 copy large not indicated not indicated 101 103 201 203 000 000 120V UL 3 total 1 total large copy total 1 copy large not indicated not ...

Page 567: ...468 5461 by default not indicated may be changed in service mode 1 is set for the following service mode item COPIER OPTION USE CNT SW 1 is set for the following service mode item COPIER OPTION USER CNT SW 10 2 2 Timing of Increasing the Count 0006 5385 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The timing at which the count is increased differs depending on the printing mode single sided or double sided ...

Page 568: ...t feed sensor PS17 goes on the machine will assume that printing on the 1st side has been completed thereby increasing the count Tray 2 No 2 delivery sensor PS1A Tray 3 No 3 delivery sensor PS5 Finisher present Delivery sensor of the finisher Condition Target of delivery Sensor ...

Page 569: ...eed Control 0006 5389 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The rotation of the 2 fans used in the machine is controlled to 2 different speeds by the voltage switchover circuit of the individual fans Notation Name Filter 2 speed control Description FM1 Heat discharge fan rear Present Used Cools the fixing assembly FM2 Heat discharge fan front Present Used Cools the fixing assembly FM2 FM1 ...

Page 570: ...nting T 10 4 Single Sided Printing T 10 5 Note 1 While the machine is in continuous printing mode the insertion of one or more double sided prints will start the control used for double sided printing Note 2 The printing interval covers the interval up to when the fixing motor M3 stops rotation Environment sensor HU1 reading Full speed half speed 25 deg C or more Full speed Less than 25 deg C Half...

Page 571: ...plies power to the side paper deck buffer path and finisher Main switch Turns on off the power to the AC driver PCB Door switch Turns on off 24 VU1 to the DC controller PCB Leakage breaker Cuts power in the event of an error Environment heater switch PCB Turns on off power to the cassette heater printer unit heater and deck heater Optional High voltage power supply PCB Generate various high voltag...

Page 572: ...To Finisher S1 To Finisher S1 Heater switch SW5 Cassette heater H4 Deck heater H7 Cassette pedestal H1C Reader heater H6 Leakage breaker ELCB2 Main switch SW1 Heater switch PCB Pickup heater mounting kit Reader heater H5 AC driver PCB Accessories power supply PCB All night power supply PCB Printer power supply PCB Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Thermal switch TP1 Controller power suppl...

Page 573: ...her S1 Heater switch SW5 Cassette heater H4 Deck heater H7 Cassette pedestal H1C Reader heater H6 Leakage breaker ELCB2 Main switch SW1 Heater switch PCB Pickup heater mounting kit Reader heater H5 AC driver PCB Accessories power supply PCB All night power supply PCB Printer power supply PCB Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Thermal switch TP1 Controller power supply PCB 13VA2 24VU2 24VU1...

Page 574: ...e the motors while 13 VDC power is used to turn on the LED array for illumination of originals F 10 7 10 4 1 4 Timing of Supply to the Reader Unit 0006 5394 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The reader unit is supplied with 24 VDC 1 3 VDC by the printer unit at such times as described below J510 J504 J502 J503 J500 J501 J505 Printer unit controller PCB To DF To printer unit scanner PCB DC24V AC10...

Page 575: ...e following diagram shows the connections between the printer unit and the various accessories used for the supply of power F 10 9 1 DADF I F cable 2 Finisher Q3 Saddle Finisher Q4 I F cable PSTBY SCAN DC 13V 24V Main power switch ON Power plug content to outlet Standby Scan Sleep mode E 6 5 4 D 3 2 C B A 1 7 ...

Page 576: ...t C Printer unit D Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 E Paper Deck Q1 10 4 1 6 Connections to Various Accessories 0008 8143 iR3530 The following diagram shows the connections between the printer unit and the various accessories used for the supply of power F 10 10 1 DADF I F cable 2 Pickup heater cable 3 Cassette pedestal I F cable 4 AC input 3 D 2 C B A 1 4 ...

Page 577: ...ed Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB 0006 5643 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The following are the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the controller power supply PCB T 10 9 Output 13VA1 13VA2 13VB 24VU1 24VU2 All night non all night non all night non all night non all night non all night Rated output 13 2V 13 2V 13 2V 24V Power supply tolerance 3 3 3 5 5 0 1 to 8A 8 6 from 0A ...

Page 578: ...d an over voltage protective mechanism that will automatically shut off the output voltage to protect its electrical circuitry in the event of a short circuit or other fault in any of its loads causing over current In the event of a fault in the 3 VB power all night power supply all supplies of power will be shut off A fault in other power supplies will shut off power to all loads except for 3 VB ...

Page 579: ...sure to exercise care whenever you have to replace the battery In certain cases it may explode Do not use a battery which is not of a type specifically indicated same name or equivalent Dispose of any used battery according to the instructions of its manufacturer 10 4 5 Energy Saving Function 10 4 5 1 Overview 0006 5741 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Standby Mode When the machine is in stand...

Page 580: ...ress on the control panel power switch incoming fax The following shows the sections of the machine that are provided with power in sleep 3 F 10 11 3 AC Off Mode When the machine is in AC off mode its power swish is off All its power supplies and its heater control mechanism are off 10 4 5 2 Machine as Supplied with Power 0006 6167 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Standby Mode Sleep Mode AC Off ...

Page 581: ...ll night 13VA2 ON ON OFF OFF non all night 24VU2 ON ON OFF OFF DC controller PCB non all night 3VA ON ON OFF OFF non all night 5VA ON ON OFF OFF non all night 13VA1 ON ON OFF OFF non all night 24VU1 ON ON OFF OFF non all night 24VU2 ON ON OFF OFF Main controller PCB non all night 3VA ON ON OFF OFF all night 3VB ON ON ON OFF non all night 5VA ON ON OFF OFF non all night 12VA ON ON OFF OFF Fax all n...

Page 582: ...h the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 12 10 5 1 2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007 6424 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the wire saddle F 10 13 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the main drive assembly 2 F 10 14 Do not touch the screws that are glued in place 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 583: ...ve the re use band 3 F 10 15 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the main drive assembly 2 F 10 16 10 5 2 Power Supply Unit 10 5 2 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6375 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed ...

Page 584: ...crew 3 then detach the left cover lower 4 If the rear cover has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 18 10 5 2 3 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB 0007 6378 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector J640 1 F 10 19 2 Remove the 6 connectors 1 and free the harness from the cable clamp 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 1 4 3 ...

Page 585: ...iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the finisher connector 2 F 10 22 2 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the pedestal connector 2 F 10 23 3 Free the harness 1 of the pedestal connector from the lamp 2 F 10 24 4 Disconnect the 7 connectors 1 and free the harness from the 4 clamps 2 F 10 25 5 Free the harness 1 from the clamp 2 ...

Page 586: ...2 F 10 27 10 5 3 Control Panel 10 5 3 1 Removing the Control Panel 0007 6426 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 F 10 28 2 Open the right door 1 F 10 29 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 30 4 Slide the control panel 1 in the direction of the arrow ...

Page 587: ...the control panel F 10 33 10 5 3 2 Removing the Control Panel 0009 2836 iR3530 1 Open the right door 1 F 10 34 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 35 3 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 4 Slide the control panel in the direction of the arrow F 10 36 5 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the control panel ...

Page 588: ...R2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 F 10 38 2 Open the right door 1 F 10 39 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 40 4 Slide the control panel 1 in the direction of the arrow F 10 41 5 Free the harness 2 from the clamp 1 F 10 42 6 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the control panel ...

Page 589: ...tch PCB then free the harness from the 2 clamps 2 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 3 between the control panel PCB and the control panel LCD Be sure to move the stopper in the direction of the arrow to detach These 2 stoppers are moved in different directions 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 3 between the control panel inverter PCB F 10 45 4 Remove the control panel inside frame 1 2 TP screws 2 and 11 s...

Page 590: ...ews 1 F 10 49 3 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 4 Slide the control panel in the direction of the arrow F 10 50 5 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the control panel F 10 51 10 5 4 6 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover 0009 2847 iR3530 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the control panel base cover 2 F 10 52 ...

Page 591: ...cable 3 F 10 53 3 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 10 54 4 Free the harness from the 3 clamps 1 F 10 55 5 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the control panel hook 2 F 10 56 6 Remove the self tapping screws 1 and the flat head screw 2 then detach the control panel frame 3 F 10 57 Routing the Harness When Mounting the Control Panel Frame 1 Check to be sure that the inverter harness is routed 1 as show...

Page 592: ...ews 2 and detach the control panel LCD PCB 3 F 10 60 10 5 5 DC Controller PCB 10 5 5 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 7370 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 61 10 5 5 2 Removing the DC Controller PCB 0007 6398 iR2270 iR2870...

Page 593: ...eplacing the DC Controller PCB Be sure to remove the boot ROM 1 from the exiting DC controller PCB and mount it to the new DC controller PCB F 10 65 10 5 6 Control Panel Inverter PCB 10 5 6 1 Removing the Control Panel 0007 6428 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 F 10 66 2 Open the right door 1 F 10 67 ...

Page 594: ...nect the connector 1 and detach the control panel F 10 71 10 5 6 2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover 0007 6430 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the control panel base cover 2 F 10 72 10 5 6 3 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB 0007 6466 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the control panel inverter PCB 1 3 connectors 2 4 screws 3 ...

Page 595: ...ews 1 F 10 75 3 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 4 Slide the control panel in the direction of the arrow F 10 76 5 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the control panel F 10 77 10 5 6 5 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover 0009 2842 iR3530 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the control panel base cover 2 F 10 78 ...

Page 596: ...cable 3 F 10 79 3 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 10 80 4 Free the harness from the 3 clamps 1 F 10 81 5 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the control panel hook 2 F 10 82 6 Remove the self tapping screws 1 and the flat head screw 2 then detach the control panel frame 3 F 10 83 Routing the Harness When Mounting the Control Panel Frame 1 Check to be sure that the inverter harness is routed 1 as show...

Page 597: ...onnect the 2 connectors 1 2 Remove the 2 self tapping screws 2 and detach the control panel inverter PCB 3 F 10 86 10 5 7 Control Panel Key Switch PCB 10 5 7 1 Removing the Control Panel 0007 6437 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 F 10 87 2 Open the right door 1 F 10 88 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 89 4 Slide the control panel 1 in the direction of the ar...

Page 598: ...h PCB then free the harness front the 3 clamps 2 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 3 between the control panel PCB and the control panel LCD Be sure to move the stopper in the direction of the arrow These 2 stoppers are moved in different directions 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 4 of the control panel inverter PCB 4 Remove the control panel inside frame 1 1 TP screw 2 11 self tapping screws 3 10 5 7 4...

Page 599: ...e 1 1 TP screw 2 11 self tapping screws 3 F 10 95 4 Remove the control panel key switch PCB 1 5 self tapping screws 2 F 10 96 10 5 7 5 Removing the Control Panel 0009 2851 iR3530 1 Open the right door 1 F 10 97 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 98 3 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 4 Slide the control panel in the direction of the arrow ...

Page 600: ...e control panel base cover 2 F 10 101 10 5 7 7 Removing the Control Panel Frame 0009 2853 iR3530 1 Disconnect the flat cable 1 in the direction of the arrow 2 Move the connector stopper 2 in the direction of the arrow and disconnect the flat cable 3 F 10 102 3 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 10 103 4 Free the harness from the 3 clamps 1 F 10 104 5 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the control ...

Page 601: ... 1 as shown in the figure F 10 107 2 After mounting the control panel frame be sure to route the inverter harness through the edge saddle 1 F 10 108 10 5 7 8 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB 0009 2854 iR3530 1 Remove the 5 self tapping screws 1 and detach the control panel key switch PCB 2 F 10 109 10 5 8 Control Panel CPU PCB 10 5 8 1 Removing the Control Panel 0007 7565 iR2270 iR2870 iR...

Page 602: ... panel 1 in the direction of the arrow F 10 113 5 Free the harness 2 from the clamp 1 F 10 114 6 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the control panel F 10 115 10 5 8 2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover 0007 7566 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the control panel base cover 2 ...

Page 603: ...D Be sure to move the stopper in the direction of the arrow Each of the 2 stoppers has its own direction of movement 3 Disconnect the control panel cable 4 4 Remove the 4 TP screws 5 and detach the control panel PCB 7 F 10 117 10 5 8 4 Removing the Control Panel 0009 2837 iR3530 1 Open the right door 1 F 10 118 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 119 3 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 4 Sli...

Page 604: ...U PCB 0009 2839 iR3530 1 Disconnect the flat cable 1 in the direction of the arrow 2 Move the connector stopper 2 in the direction of the arrow to detach the flat cable 3 F 10 123 3 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 10 124 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the control panel CPU PCB 2 F 10 125 10 5 9 All Night Power Supply PCB 10 5 9 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6385 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR...

Page 605: ...0 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the 4 connectors 1 F 10 127 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the all night power supply PCB 2 F 10 128 10 5 10 Controller Power Supply PCB 10 5 10 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6380 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the sc...

Page 606: ...wer 4 If the rear cover has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 130 10 5 10 3 Removing the Left Cover Rear 0007 6382 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then detach the left cover rear 2 F 10 131 10 5 10 4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB 0007 6383 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector J640 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1...

Page 607: ... 0007 6384 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 10 135 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and detach the controller power supply PCB 2 F 10 136 10 5 11 Option Power Supply PCB 10 5 11 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6370 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detac...

Page 608: ...wer 4 If the rear cover has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 138 10 5 11 3 Removing the Left Cover Rear 0007 6372 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then detach the left cover rear 2 F 10 139 10 5 11 4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB 0007 6373 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector J640 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1...

Page 609: ...B 10 5 12 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 8021 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the front cover 1 F 10 143 2 Remove the face cover rubber 1 3 Remove the binding screw 2 4 Remove the RS tightening screw 3 5 Detach the front cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 10 144 10 5 12 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8028 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the ...

Page 610: ...2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Shift up the lever 1 F 10 147 2 Remove the toner cartridge 1 F 10 148 Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge 1 Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop 1 against the covers or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge Since the toner stop comes off easily toner scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident 2 Keep the toner cartri...

Page 611: ...R2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door 1 F 10 150 2 Remove the screw 1 F 10 151 3 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 10 152 4 Remove the screw 1 F 10 153 5 Remove the drum unit 1 F 10 154 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown 1 ...

Page 612: ...70 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 F 10 156 2 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 10 157 3 Slide the developing assembly 1 slightly to the front then disconnect the connector 2 F 10 158 4 Remove the developing assembly 1 F 10 159 ...

Page 613: ...hat A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail F 10 161 10 5 12 6 Removing the Upper Tray 0007 8403 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the upper tray 2 F 10 162 Reference Lift the front of the upper tray 1 and detach it as if to slide it toward the front F 10 163 10 5 12 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007 8404 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 R...

Page 614: ...165 2 While freeing the lock 1 toward the right detach the pre exposure lamp 2 F 10 166 F 10 167 10 5 12 9 Removing the Left Cover 0007 8407 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the left cover 2 F 10 168 10 5 12 10 Removing the Laser Unit 0007 8409 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 615: ...the connector 2 F 10 170 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing 2 F 10 171 4 Lift the front of the laser unit 1 and slide it to the front F 10 172 When sliding out the laser scanner unit be sure to take care not to touch the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment se...

Page 616: ...10 176 When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine be sure that the connectors 1 are securely connected If the connectors 1 are not connected the environment heater will not be supplied with power leading to image faults F 10 177 10 5 12 12 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 8412 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Ope...

Page 617: ...ove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 10 180 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 10 181 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 10 182 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 618: ...he 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 10 5 12 14 Removing the Right Door 0007 8416 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 10 185 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 10 186 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 10 187 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse ban...

Page 619: ...hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 10 190 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 10 5 12 15 Removing the Right Door 0007 8417 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 10 191 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the ri...

Page 620: ...ok found on the side plate F 10 193 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 10 5 12 16 Removing the Fixing Unit 0007 8419 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 10 194 2 Disconcert the 3 connectors 1 F 10 195 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 10 196 4 Detach the fixing unit 1 toward the front ...

Page 621: ...ntact with the gear 4 F 10 198 Do not touch the screw 1 Turning it will change the pressure of the fixing assembly which cannot be adjusted in the field necessitating the replacement of the fixing assembly F 10 199 10 5 12 17 Removing the Gear 0007 8420 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the gear cover 2 F 10 200 2 Remove the gear 1 F 10 201 ...

Page 622: ...202 2 Slide the guide 1 as shown to detach F 10 203 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the latch 2 and 3 screws 3 then detach the high voltage PCB 4 F 10 204 F 10 205 10 5 13 Exhaust Fan 10 5 13 1 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan 0007 6433 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 10 206 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 10 207 A B C ...

Page 623: ...detach the heat discharge fan 2 F 10 210 10 5 13 2 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan 0007 7531 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 10 211 2 Remove the 2 self tapping screws 2 and detach the upper right cover 1 F 10 212 3 Remove the self tapping screw 1 and detach the feed guide 2 F 10 213 4 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the feed guide lower 2 ...

Page 624: ...ove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 216 10 5 14 2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007 6418 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the wire saddle F 10 217 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the main drive assembly 2 1 1 1 ...

Page 625: ... drive motor 2 F 10 219 Points to Note During the Work Be sure that the 2 timing belts 2 are fitted to the shaft 1 of the main drive motor as shown F 10 220 Adjusting the Tension of the Main Drive Motor 1 Temporarily fix the main drive motor in place to the main motor base 2 So that the motor gear 1 and the teeth 2 of the pulley mesh correctly move the motor in the direction of the arrow ...

Page 626: ...sconnect the 2 connectors 1 F 10 223 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the main dive motor 2 F 10 224 10 5 15 Fixing Driver Motor 10 5 15 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6403 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed ...

Page 627: ... connector 1 F 10 226 How to Remove the Flexible Cable 1 F 10 227 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the DC controller PCB F 10 228 Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB Be sure to remove the boot ROM 1 from the exiting DC controller PCB and mount it to the new DC controller PCB F 10 229 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 ...

Page 628: ...ight Door 10 5 16 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 7020 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 10 232 10 5 16 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6444 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Open the right door F 10 233 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the f...

Page 629: ...5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 10 237 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 10 238 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 10 5 16 3 Removing the Right Doo...

Page 630: ...ug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 10 241 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 10 5 17 Circuit Braker 10 5 17 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6388 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left c...

Page 631: ...R3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 243 2 Remove the 4 fastons 1 and detach the circuit breaker 2 F 10 244 Points to Note When Mounting When mounting the circuit breaker be sure that the AC harness is identified correctly by color as shown F 10 245 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 ...

Page 632: ......

Page 633: ...Chapter 11 MEAP ...

Page 634: ......

Page 635: ...Contents Contents 11 1 Overview 11 1 11 2 MEAP Counter 11 2 11 3 Construction of the MEAP Platform 11 4 ...

Page 636: ......

Page 637: ...architecture is based on Java J2ME i e Java 2 Platform Micro Edition and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications A MEAP application behaves independently from its host printer s system software and may be installed or uninstalled using SMS Service Management Service which is an interface that runs as part of the browser on a PC As long as the device supports MEAP most MEAP applica...

Page 638: ...o display all depend on the application in question A counter reading may be of a type that is forced to increase as a job is expected or of a type that is increased when the application sends instructions or it may be of a type that increases independently of the host device thus increasing solely in response to the application being run specifics are as follows T 11 1 Type Count item forced tota...

Page 639: ...se to execution of a job in response to instructions from application the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from the application application independent the counter operates according to the specifications of the application free 12 Type Count item ...

Page 640: ...se of a mismatch the device will not be able to run the MEAP application For version information refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in conjunction with the system software The following shows the components of a MEAP application F 11 1 1 User Interface Control Bock installed as part of the system software 2 Device Control Block installed as part of the system software 3 Ope...

Page 641: ...Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection ...

Page 642: ......

Page 643: ...cedure 12 5 12 3 1 Scheduled Servicing for the Reader Unit 12 5 12 3 2 Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit 12 5 12 3 3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedures 12 8 12 3 4 Points to Note About the Scheduled Servicing 12 10 12 4 Cleaning 12 12 12 4 1 Cleaning the Transfer Feed Guide 12 12 12 4 2 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer Feed Guide Dust 12 12 12 4 3 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Elim...

Page 644: ......

Page 645: ...formance regardless of the presence absence of external changes or damage If possible schedule the replacement so that it coincides with a scheduled service visit The timing of replacement may vary depending on the site environment or user habit 12 1 2 Reader Unit 0007 4596 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The reader unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement 12 1 3 Printer Uni...

Page 646: ...ing service mode item to check the timing of replacement Copier COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 COPIER COUNTER MISC Accessory COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 12 2 2 Reader Unit 0007 4599 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 The reader unit does not have parts that are classified as durables 12 2 3 Printer Unit 0007 4600 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 T 12 1 As of Dec 2004 Ref Parts name Parts No Q t y Life Remarks ...

Page 647: ...150 000 prints iR2270 2870 2230 2830 Pressure roller FC5 7207 000 1 240 000 prints iR3570 4570 3530 6 Waste toner box FM2 0303 000 1 75 000 prints iR2270 2870 2230 2830 Waste toner box FM2 0303 000 1 85 000 prints iR3570 4570 3530 7 Fixing heat discharge roller FB5 4931 000 1 150 000 prints iR2270 2870 2230 2830 Fixing heat discharge roller FB5 4931 000 1 240 000 prints iR3570 4570 3530 8 Pickup r...

Page 648: ...000 prints iR3570 4570 3530 13 Pressure roller bushing RS5 1446 000 2 300 000 prints iR2270 2870 2230 2830 The value is the mean value collected from the results of evaluation The parts number may change because of changes in design As of Dec 2004 Ref Parts name Parts No Q t y Life Remarks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 11 10 12 12 13 13 ...

Page 649: ...eduled servicing Be sure to clean the copyboard glass and the ADF reading glass during every service visit 12 3 2 Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit 0007 5176 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated T 12 2 Tran sfer asse mbly Location Transfer feed guide assembly Task clean dry wiping Interval 120 000 prints Remarks 1 Feed guide 2 Transfer gu...

Page 650: ...Deve lopin g asse mbly Location Photosensitive drum butting spacer feed guide Task clean dry wiping Interval 120 000 prints Remarks 1 Photosensitive drum butting spacer 2 Feed guide ...

Page 651: ...t guide Task clean dry wiping alcohol Interval 120 000 prints Remarks 1 Fixing inlet guide Location Film bias static eliminator Task clean Interval 150 000 prints iR2270 2870 240 000 prints iR3570 4570 Remarks 1 Film bias static eliminator ...

Page 652: ...r oily smoke the resulting buildup can prove to be a fire hazard The buildup of dust for instance can absorb moisture and suffer insulating failure Be sure to disconnect the power plug on a periodical basis and remove any buildup of dust and dirt with a dry cloth Work Procedure 1 Report to the person in change and have an understanding of the situation 2 Record the counter reading and check the fa...

Page 653: ...the test switch of the leakage breaker to see if the breaker operates normally i e the lever will shift to OFF to cut off the power If the leakage breaker fails to operate normally replace the breaker and make a check once again Resetting When you have checked the operation of the leakage breaker turn off the power switch shift the lever to ON and turn on the power switch Item Test copy image dens...

Page 654: ...e be sure also to indicate the check on the leakage breaker in the history of checks 12 3 4 Points to Note About the Scheduled Servicing 0007 5177 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 If you used solvent be sure that it has dried before putting the part back into the machine Unless otherwise indicated do not use a cloth moistened with water Be sure to provide scheduled servicing at specific interval...

Page 655: ...xing inlet guide clean dry wiping alcohol 4 Photosensitive drum butting spacer clean dry wiping 5 Dust blocking glass clean dry wiping or with alcohol 6 Waste toner collection case check 7 Leakage breaker check 8 Film bias static eliminator clean ...

Page 656: ...0 1 Open the right door F 12 3 2 Clean dry wipe the feed guide 1 and the transfer guide 2 F 12 4 3 Close the right door 12 4 2 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer Feed Guide Dust Blocking Glass and Fixing Inlet Guide 0007 5128 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 A Preparatory Work 1 Open the upper front cover 1 ...

Page 657: ...Chapter 12 12 13 F 12 5 2 Remove the face rubber 1 and the 2 screws 2 then slide the front cover unit 3 to the left to detach F 12 6 3 Remove the waste toner box 1 F 12 7 4 Open the right door 1 ...

Page 658: ... 12 12 14 F 12 8 5 Remove the locking screw 1 of the pressure lever F 12 9 6 Shift the locking lever 1 of the developing assembly to the left to release the developing assembly F 12 10 7 Remove the screw M5 1 ...

Page 659: ... 1 F 12 12 Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum Do not expose the surface of the photosensitive drum to light more than necessary Do not touch the spur of the drum unit 9 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the developing assembly 2 ...

Page 660: ...nd the Feed Guide 1 Clean the developing assembly spacer 1 and the feed guide 2 Dry wipe them using lint free paper F 12 14 C Cleaning the Dust Blocking Glass 1 Clean the dust blocking glass 1 Dry wipe it or use alcohol F 12 15 D Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide ...

Page 661: ...ixing inlet guide upper 1 with alcohol Be sure to completely remove all toner sticking to the fixing inlet guide upper F 12 17 3 Clean the fixing inlet guide lower 1 using lint free paper F 12 18 4 Mount the fixing inlet guide upper using a screw w washer E After the Work 1 Put the drum unit 1 in the machine 1 ...

Page 662: ...achine 3 1 Place segment A of the developing assembly on segment B of the developing assembly rail 3 2 By sliding the base 2 of the developing assembly 1 along the developing assembly rail 3 fit the assembly in place inside the machine F 12 21 4 Connect the connector 1 and push the developing assembly 2 all the way in ...

Page 663: ...22 5 Shift back the locking lever 1 of the developing assembly to the right to lock the assembly in place F 12 23 6 Fit and tighten the screw 1 of the locking lever F 12 24 7 Close the right door 8 Fit the waste toner box 1 ...

Page 664: ... 9 Mount the front cover unit 3 using 2 screws 2 and fit the face rubber 1 At this time be sure to slide it to the right so that the claw of the front cover matches the machine F 12 26 10 Close the upper front cover 1 F 12 27 ...

Page 665: ...3530 A Removing the Right Door 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if w Cassette Feeding Unit 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 12 28 4 Open the right door F 12 29 5 Remove the self tapping screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 666: ... 1 and detach the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 12 31 7 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening 3 F 12 32 8 Free and detach the right door 1 from the hinge assembly 2 F 12 33 ...

Page 667: ...12 23 B Removing the Fixing Assembly 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 12 34 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 12 35 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 12 36 4 Remove the fixing unit 1 toward the front ...

Page 668: ...move the 2 screws 1 and detach the grounding plate 2 F 12 38 2 Clean the film bias static eliminator 1 found behind the grounding plate to remove the cake of toner if any that may have collected on the static eliminator F 12 39 3 Mount the grounding plate 2 with 2 screws 1 ...

Page 669: ...Chapter 12 12 25 F 12 40 D Mounting the Fixing Assembly 1 Mount the fixing unit 1 to the machine frame F 12 41 2 Secure the fixing assembly in place using 4 screws 1 F 12 42 3 Connect the 3 connectors 1 ...

Page 670: ...ing the Right Door 1 Match the hole 1 of the right door bottom and the pin 2 F 12 45 2 Match the mounting plate 1 of the right door top against the hook 2 and mount the right door 3 Secure the mounting plate 1 using 3 screws 3 4 Connect the connector 4 and fit the reuse band 5 in place ...

Page 671: ...livery kit 1 slightly to match it against the right door 2 F 12 47 When matching the position take care so that the expansion delivery kit will not open wider than 80 deg 7 Push in the pin 1 through the hole 2 until it stops then connect the expansion delivery kit 3 to the right door 4 ...

Page 672: ...n is fully fitted as shown in the figure 8 Using the self tapping screw 1 you removed in step A 5 fix the joint plate 2 in place Check to be sure that the protrusion 3 of the joint plate is fully in the mounting hole F 12 50 10 Mount the right cover rear using 5 screws ...

Page 673: ...ht door 12 4 4 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator 0008 2928 iR2270 iR2870 iR3530 A Removing the Right Door 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 12 52 4 Open the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 674: ...use band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 6 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening 3 then detach the right door F 12 54 B Removing the Fixing Assembly 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 12 55 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 ...

Page 675: ...er 12 12 31 F 12 56 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 12 57 4 Slide out the fixing unit 1 toward the front F 12 58 C Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the grounding plate 2 ...

Page 676: ...und on the back of the grounding plate Be sure to remove the cake of toner that may have collected on the static eliminator F 12 60 3 Fix the grounding plate 2 in place using 2 screws 1 F 12 61 D Mounting the Fixing Assembly 1 Fit the fixing unit 1 to the machine frame 1 ...

Page 677: ...Chapter 12 12 33 F 12 62 2 Secure the fixing assembly in place using 4 screws 1 F 12 63 3 Connect the 3 connectors 1 F 12 64 4 Mount the harness cover 2 using a screw 1 ...

Page 678: ...ound at the bottom of the right door against the protrusion 2 Engage the hinge 2 found at the top of the right door on the hook on the machine side plate F 12 66 3 Fix the mounting base 1 in place using 2 screws 3 4 Connect the connector 4 and fit the reuse band 5 in place ...

Page 679: ...Chapter 12 12 35 F 12 67 5 Mount the right cover rear using 5 screws Take care not to trap the harness 1 by the cut off 2 of the right cover re F 12 68 6 Close the right door ...

Page 680: ......

Page 681: ...Chapter 13 Standards and Adjustments ...

Page 682: ......

Page 683: ...on System 13 15 13 4 1 After Replacing the Developing Unit 13 15 13 4 2 After Replacing the Drum Unit APVC correction 13 15 13 5 Electrical Components 13 16 13 5 1 After Replacing the HDD 13 16 13 5 2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB 13 16 13 5 3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB 13 17 13 5 4 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB 13 18 13 6 Pickup Feeding System 13 21 13 6 1 Adjusti...

Page 684: ......

Page 685: ...age position as follows 1 Adjusting the Leading Edge Image Margin 1st side Adjust the registration in service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST F 13 5 2 Adjusting the Left Right Image 1st side Mechanical Horizontal Registration Adjustment 3 Adjusting the Leading Edge Image Margin 2nd side Adjust the registration in service mode 2 5 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 2 5 1 5mm 2nd side of double sided copy...

Page 686: ...se the margin by 1 mm 2 5 4 6 8 1012141618 20 0 2nd side of double sided copy 2 5 2 0mm Image left edge Increase the ADFJ REFE value an increase of 10 will increase the non image width by 1 mm Decrease the AD J REFE setting a decrease of 10 will decrease the non image width by 1 mm 10 8 6 5 4 2 0 2nd side of small size double sided copy 2 5 2 0mm Paper left edge Increase the ADJ RE L setting an in...

Page 687: ...age margin 1st side 4 Remove the 2 claws 2 and detach the grip right front 1 F 13 13 5 Loosen the fixing screw 2 on the horizontal registration adjusting plate 1 of the cassette 6 While referring to the index you checked in step 3 move the horizontal registration adjusting plate back and forth Moving the plate toward the rear of the machine will increase the left right image margin along the image...

Page 688: ...o make sure that the margin is as indicated 9 Mount the right front cover of the machine B Adjusting the Left Right Image Margin 2nd side B 1 2nd Side of Small Size Paper left right image margin 1 If the margin is not as indicated change the setting of the 2nd side left right image margin of the cassette 1 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REFE An increase of 1 will decrease the left right image margin a...

Page 689: ...l feed d tray F 13 18 5 So that the margin is as indicated move the top cover of the manual feed tray back and forth Moving the top cover of the manual feed tray toward the rear of the machine will decrease the left right image margin along the front side 6 Tighten fixing screw on the top cover of the manual feed tray 7 Put paper in the manual feed tray 8 Make a copy using the manual feed tray as ...

Page 690: ...mage Margin 1s side mechanical adjustment 1 Make a copy using the paper deck as the source of paper and check to make sure that the left right image margin in the image front direction is 2 5 1 5 mm If not as indicated go through the following 2 Slide out the compartment 3 Turn the 2 screws 2 to adjust the mounting position of the latch plate 1 of the deck open solenoid SL2D found at the left rear...

Page 691: ... the reader controller and download it after initializing the RAM so that you need not perform the following 1 Reader Unit Related Adjustments 1 Using the SST download the latest system software R CON 2 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER FUNCTION LEARN R CON Then press the OK key to initialize the RAM thereafter turn off and then on the main power 3 Enter the following values in ...

Page 692: ...p position adjustment FEEDER ADJSUT DOCST c original feed speed magnification adjustment FEEDER ADUST LA SPEED 2 Make adjustments using the following service mode items a Tray Width Adjustment FEEDER FUNCTION TRY A4 FEEDER FUNCTION TRY A5R FEEDER FUNCTION TRY LTR FEEDER FUNCTION TRY LTRR b CIS Read Position Adjustment for stream reading COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STRD POS c White Level Adjustment COP...

Page 693: ...osure System 13 3 1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit 0007 5178 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Enter the values recorded on the label on the laser scanner unit for the following in service mode COPIER ADJUST LASER LA DELAY ...

Page 694: ...isappear when 3 or so copies are made 13 4 2 After Replacing the Drum Unit APVC correction 0007 5181 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Connect the power plug to the power outlet and turn on the main power unit 2 In the host machine s service mode make the following selections COPIER FUNCTION DPC D GAMMA 3 Press the OK key The machine will pick up paper from cassette 1 regardless of the size of ...

Page 695: ...FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 1 Using the SST download the latest system software 2 Using the following service mode item initialize the memory of the DC controller PCB COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR DC CON 3 Using the following service mode items enter the values indicated on the P PRINT page COPIER ADJUST LASER LA DELAY LA OFF POWER COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP DE OFST COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK T BLANK B COPIER ADJUS...

Page 696: ... sec or more and turn it back on Unless you have registered system control group ID and system control ID No you will not be able to register cards for the device in the course of Net Spot Accountant setup work 12 Download the card ID Keep the machine in a standby state and download the card ID to be used from the NSA 13 Check the count control particulars in user mode system control setup group I...

Page 697: ... related adjustments 1 Enter the following values by referring to the values indicated on the P PRINT page you have previously printed out a main scanning direction position adjustment for stream reading COPIER ADJSUT ADJ XY ADJ Y DF b original stop position adjustment FEEDER ADJSUT DOCST c original feed speed magnification adjustment FEEDER ADUST LA SPEED 2 Make adjustments using the following se...

Page 698: ...5 mm If the value is not as indicated for the cassette 1 or 2 make the following adjustments F 13 25 2 If a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 is installed open the right door 1 of the pedestal 3 Open the lower right cover 2 then remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the cover lower front 4 F 13 26 4 Take out the cassette 1 or 2 5 Check the index 1 of the adjusting plate F 13 27 Adjusting the Cassette 1 6 Remove t...

Page 699: ...e 7 While referring to the index you checked in step 5 move the adjusting plate back and forth Moving the adjusting plate toward the rear of the machine will increase the margin along the image front F 13 30 8 Tighten the fixing screw 9 Put the cassette 2 back in place 10 Make a copy using the cassette 2 as the source of paper and check to make sure that the margin in the image front direction is ...

Page 700: ...sided small and large size copies and check to make sure that the front margin is 2 5 2 0 mm A sheet is large size if its length in feed direction is longer than A4 LTR F 13 33 2 If the value is not as indicated change the adjustment value of the 2nd side horizontal registration for small large size COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REFE small size COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ RE L large size An increases ...

Page 701: ...ing the Paper Width Basic Value 0007 4926 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Turn on the main power switch 2 Register the paper width basic value for A4R as follows 2 1 Match the manual feed side guide 1 against the A4R marking F 13 36 2 2 Start service mode and select register manual feed d A4R width CPOIER FUNCTION CST MF A4R 2 3 Press the OK key to save the new A4R width 3 Register the paper ...

Page 702: ...t down sequence shown on the control panel so that the main power switch may be turned off 8 Turn off the main power switch 9 Wait for 3 sec or more then turn the main power switch back on 10 Print out the latest P ROINT page in service mode 11 Put the printed P PRINT page 1 in the service book case and dispose of the previous printout F 13 37 ...

Page 703: ...Chapter 14 Correcting Faulty Images ...

Page 704: ......

Page 705: ... 2 1 3 3 Black Dots 14 14 14 2 1 4 Ghost Memory 14 15 14 2 1 4 1 Ghost 14 15 14 2 2 Malfunction 14 16 14 2 2 1 No Power 14 16 14 2 2 1 1 Upon installation machine does not start up LCD does not come on although main power 14 16 14 2 2 2 Noise 14 17 14 2 2 2 1 Noise at Time of Pickup from the Cassette 14 17 14 2 3 Transmission fax related 14 17 14 2 3 1 Transmission Problem 14 17 14 2 3 1 1 Latter ...

Page 706: ...estinations stored in Address Book and One Touch buttons at once 14 22 14 3 Outline of Electrical Components 14 23 14 3 1 Clutch Solenoid 14 23 14 3 1 1 Clutches and Solenoids 14 23 14 3 2 Motor 14 24 14 3 2 1 Motors 14 24 14 3 3 Fan 14 27 14 3 3 1 Fans 14 27 14 3 4 Sensor 14 28 14 3 4 1 Sensors 14 28 14 3 5 Switch 14 33 14 3 5 1 Switches 14 33 14 3 6 Lamps Heaters and Others 14 34 14 3 6 1 Lamps ...

Page 707: ...t can be used by the machine at all times 14 1 2 Checking the Paper 0007 9384 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 a Be sure the paper being used is of a type recommended by Canon b Be sure that the paper is not moist Try using paper fresh out of package 14 1 3 Checking the Placement of Paper 0007 9385 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 a There must be paper in the cassette or the tray deposited wit...

Page 708: ...reign matter Check to make sure that there is no buildup of paper around the pickup feed and separation rollers See that they are free of wear scratches dirt and deformation Check to make sure that the paper is free of a bent leading edge and is free of curling waving and excess moisture Try using paper and transparency of a type recommended by Canon to see if the problem is corrected Mechanical C...

Page 709: ...that the power and signal cables are correctly routed Check to see that the operation of the cover switch is normal Check to see that none of the fuses on the PCBs have an open circuit Check to see that the user has a correct understanding of how to use the machine and is using it correctly 14 1 7 Others 0007 9389 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 If a machine is brought from a cold to warm room ...

Page 710: ...o stop thus stopping the operation without removing charges from the surface of the photosensitive drum If the machine is left alone for a long time with the surface potential of its photosensitive drum uneven potential memory tends to occur within a layer of the photosensitive drum ultimately resulting in uneven density in sub scanning direction Field Remedy To rid the surface of the photosensiti...

Page 711: ...0007 9967 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Symptom Uneven density at specific intervals tends to occur in sub scanning direction from leading edge to trailing edge in relation to paper movement when the main motor starts to rotate irregularly iR2270 2870 intervals of about 3 5 mm ...

Page 712: ...oping Assembly 0008 3408 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Inspected by Canon Inc Description As a result of inspection it was found this symptom occurred because the laser light was intercepted by dust on the top cover of the developing assembly If the symptom occurs remove the developing assembly and clean its top cover referring to the Service Manual Maintenance and Inspection Cleaning Cleanin...

Page 713: ... Inc Description As a result of inspection it was found this symptom occurred because foreign substances on the edge of the feed guide of the developing assembly came into contact with the surface of the drum If the symptom occurs clean the feed guide referring to the Service Manual Maintenance and Inspection Cleaning Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer Feed Guide Dust Blocking Glass and Fixin...

Page 714: ... change causing uneven rotation and thus blurring This problem tends to occur during the initial period of use less than 10K when the coefficient of friction is relatively even or when a halftone image is generated after leaving the machine alone for 1 to 2 days This problem on the other hand tends to disappear when about 10 printouts are made This problem can also occur when the drum unit is take...

Page 715: ... the friction Field Remedy Make about 10 copies of the Test Chart Image Sample F 14 4 14 2 1 2 4 White Lines in Sub Scanning Direction 0007 7465 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Cause The presence of foreign matter inside the developing assembly can make its way to the developing cylinder ...

Page 716: ...eplacing the fixing assembly and work with the developing assembly inside the machine the developing cylinder will remain exposed and become subjected to dust or other foreign matter For this reason it is important to remove the developing assembly as well as the drum unit when disassembling and assembling the image formation or fixing system This however does not apply if you are simply replacing...

Page 717: ...sponse to the heat from the fixing assembly thus causing toner to fly astray This problem tends to occur when paper has low resistance and in a high temperature high humidity environment Field Remedy Use the following service mode item to decrease the developing bias thus suppressing the symptom COPIER OPTION BODY FIX SMR 0 default 1 decrease the developing bias by a single step 20 V 2 decrease th...

Page 718: ...topositive surface comes close to or into contact with the toner coated surface of paper the toner layer can become shifted toward the trailing edge of the paper This problem tends to be conspicuous when the toner layer is relatively high against the width of lines about 0 2 to 0 6 mm and in addition when the lines are at a right angle to the feed direction axial direction of the photosensitive dr...

Page 719: ...rease the developing bias thus suppressing the symptom COPIER OPTION BODY FIX SMR 0 default 1 decrease the developing bias by a single step 20 V 2 decrease the developing bias by 2 steps 40 V If 2 is selected the lines can become thinner Image Sample F 14 7 ...

Page 720: ...ng film or the pressure roller to the face or back of paper Field Remedy Use the following service mode item to change the timing at which the fixing pressure roller is cleaned COPIER OPTION BODY FIX CLN 0 disable cleaning default 1 execute cleaning during last rotation every 500 printouts 2 execute cleaning during last rotation every 200 printouts 3 execute cleaning during last rotation every 100...

Page 721: ...4 2 1 4 1 Ghost 0007 7096 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Cause This problem tends to occur when there are both residual toner and fresh toner on the developing cylinder and thus difference in charge between these two kinds of toner Field Remedy ...

Page 722: ...ge Sample F 14 9 14 2 2 Malfunction 14 2 2 1 No Power 14 2 2 1 1 Upon installation machine does not start up LCD does not come on although main power indicator on control panel lights up Poor connection of ROM RAM 0008 3477 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 ...

Page 723: ...m 14 2 3 1 1 Latter half of image is lost when scanning and sending A3 size original from DF 0009 2432 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Inspected by Canon Inc Description As a result of inspection the following was found When an A3 size original with sharp folds is set in the document feeder DF the machine detects it as A4 size and scans the corresponding area This is because the latter half of ...

Page 724: ... Remedy You can select in service mode whether or not the operation panel for the mail box functions is displayed In order not to display it change the setting in service mode Level 2 COPIER Option BODY UI BOX set it to 0 not display Then turn the control panel switch OFF and turn the main power switch OFF ON 14 2 4 1 3 How to check estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable pa...

Page 725: ... Specifications Function List Types of Paper 14 2 4 1 6 How to clear system administrator password 0009 2416 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Manual related Field Remedy In service mode COPIER Function CLEAR PWD CLR press the OK key Then turn the control panel switch OFF and turn the main power OFF ON 14 2 4 1 7 Applicable paper types 0009 2418 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Manual related D...

Page 726: ...ecessary options when expanding iR Security Kit A2 0009 2424 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Manual related Description The following options are necessary when expanding the iR Security Kit A2 License Expansion Bus B1 USB Application Interface Board D1 14 2 4 1 11 Stack Bypass Standard Settings How to register arbitrary paper size and paper type as standard mode for stack bypass 0009 2426 iR22...

Page 727: ...FAX Specifications 14 2 4 3 1 How to display FAX error codes on Activity Report 0009 2410 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Manual related Field Remedy In service mode FAX SSSW SW01 bit0 set it at 1 14 2 4 3 2 How to output System Dump List 0009 2411 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Manual related Field Remedy In service mode FAX REPORT DUMP press the OK key to output the system dump list 14 2 ...

Page 728: ...ress Book and One Touch buttons at once 0009 2429 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Manual related Field Remedy In service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ADRS BK OK then turn the control panel power switch off and switch on the main power of the machine again ...

Page 729: ...d pickup roller CL2 registration clutch drives the registration roller CL3 developing sleeve clutch drives the developing sleeve CL6 duplex feed clutch drives the duplex roller 1 2 iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F SL1 cassette 1 pickup solenoid drives the cassette 1 pickup roller SL2 cassette 2 pickup solenoid drives the cassette 2 pickup roller Notatio n Parts No PART CHK DC controller PCB CL1 FH6 5076 CL...

Page 730: ...4570 iR3530 Reader Unit T 14 3 T 14 4 SL1 FK2 0408 SL 1 J308 SL2 FK2 0408 SL 2 J318 Notation Name Description M501 reader motor drives the carriage Notati on Parts No Reader controller PCB Error M501 FH5 1028 J505 E202 Notatio n Parts No PART CHK DC controller PCB CL1 CL2 CL6 SL1 SL2 CL3 ...

Page 731: ...ter unit M3 fixing motor drives the fixing assembly M4 delivery motor 1 drives the delivery roller M5 bottle rotation motor drives the rotation of the bottle M6 cassette 1 pickup motor drives the pickup unit 1 M7 cassette 2 pickup motor drives the pickup unit 2 M10 duplex feed motor drives the duplex roller 1 2 iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F M12 hopper motor drives the hopper M501 ...

Page 732: ...334 iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F MTR 1 J316 E110 M2 FK2 0385 iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F FM2 0362 iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F MTR 2 J312 E010 M3 FK2 0367 MTR 3 J311 J319 E014 M4 FK2 0365 MTR 4 J305 M5 FK2 0015 MTR 5 J302A E025 M6 FK2 0377 MTR 6 J307A M7 FK2 0377 MTR 7 J307A M10 FL2 3266 MTR 8 306 M12 FK2 0379 MTR 9 J302A E025 ...

Page 733: ...Chapter 14 14 27 F 14 12 14 3 3 Fan 14 3 3 1 Fans 0007 6836 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have a fan Printer Unit M4 M1 M12 M3 M2 M6 M7 M5 M10 ...

Page 734: ...70 iR3530 Reader Unit Notatio n Name Description FM1 heat discharge fan front discharges heat from the fixing unit FM2 heat discharge fan rear discharges heat from the fixing unit Notati on Parts No I O DC controller PCB Error FM1 FK2 0360 P020 6 1 ON J307B E805 FM2 FK2 0360 P023 2 1 ON J307B E805 FM1 FM2 ...

Page 735: ...detects original size for all countries PS507 original sensor 4 detects original size AB Inch AB PS508 original sensor 5 detects original size Inch A CIS1 CIS reads originals Notatio n Parts No I O Reader controller PCB Jam error code PS501 WG8 5624 P006 7 1 copyboard cover closed J506 PS502 WG8 5624 P006 5 1 copyboard cover closed J506 0090 0091 PS503 WG8 5624 P006 6 1 HP J506 E202 PS504 FH7 7569...

Page 736: ...paper level B in cassette 2 PS7 manual feeder paper sensor detects paper in the manual feeder PS8 fixing film speed sensor detects the speed of the fixing film PS9 pre registration sensor detects paper before registration PS10 cassette 1 retry sensor detects pickup retry in cassette 1 PS11 cassette 2 retry sensor detects pickup retry in cassettes 2 PS13 fixing outlet sensor detects paper at the fi...

Page 737: ... the drum TP1 thermal switch cuts off the power to the heater in response to overheating Notatio n Parts No I O DC controller PCB JAM PS1 FH7 7312 P028 5 1 paper absent J308 PS2 FH7 7312 P019 5 1 paper absent J318 PS3 FH7 7312 P028 6 1 level about 50 or less J308 PS4 FH7 7312 P028 7 1 level about 50 sheets or less J308 PS5 FH7 7312 P019 6 1 level about 50 or less J318 PS6 FH7 7312 P019 7 1 level a...

Page 738: ...2 0149 J302B HU1 FK2 0160 J302A TS1 FK2 0358 J302B TS2 FK2 0358 J302A Notation Parts No DC controller PCB AC driver PCB TH1 TH 2 fixing film unit iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F FM2 0293 100V FM2 0358 120V FM2 0359 230V iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F FM2 1792 100V FM2 1793 120V FM2 1794 230V J304 TP1 J202 TH3 FM2 2776 J302A Notatio n Parts No I O DC controller PCB JAM ...

Page 739: ...ch 14 3 5 1 Switches 0007 6838 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have a switch Printer Unit PS15 PS14 PS17 PS7 PS9 HU1 PS16 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 PS10 PS11 PS18 TS1 TS2 PS13 PS8 TH1 TH2 TP1 TH3 PS22 ...

Page 740: ...570 iR4570 iR3530 Reader Unit Notation Name Description SW1 main power switch turns on off the main power switch SW2 door switch checks the right door SW5 environment heater switch turns on off the environment heater option Notatio n Parts No DC controller PCB AC driver PCB SW1 FK2 0140 J201 SW2 FK2 0384 J309 SW5 WC1 5182 SW1 SW5 SW2 ...

Page 741: ... on the copyboard glass LCD1 LCD panel FL2 1092 display on the control panel touch panel Notation Name Description H1 fixing main heater fixing main heater H2 fixing sub heater fixing sub heater H4 cassette heater prevents absorption of moisture by the paper inside the cassette H7 deck heater prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the side deck ELCB1 leakage breaker 100V leakage breaker H...

Page 742: ...manual feeder SP1 speaker speaker fax unit Notation Parts No H1 H2 fixing film unit iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F FM2 0293 100V FM2 0358 120V FM2 0359 230V fixing film unit iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F FM2 1792 100V FM2 1793 120V FM2 1794 230V H4 FK2 0375 100V FK2 0376 230V H7 NPN 100V FH7 4585 230V ELCB1 FH7 7626 ELCB2 FH7 7625 Notatio n Parts No Main controller PCB DC controller PCB LA1 FK2 0368 J302B VA1 ...

Page 743: ...arts No Description H5 Reader heater left NPN Prevents condensation on the reading glass 100 230 V H6 Reader heater right NPN Prevents condensation on the platen board glass 100 230 V LCD1 LCD panel FH6 0735 Control panel indication touch panel Notatio n Parts No Main controller PCB DC controller PCB HDD1 H1 H2 LA1 VA1 SVR1 ELCB1 ELCB2 H4 SP1 H7 ...

Page 744: ...heater Prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the cassette H7 Deck heater Prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the side deck ELCB 1 Leakage breaker 100 V Leakage breaker ELCB 2 Leakage breaker 230 V Leakage breaker LA1 Pre exposure lamp Removes residual charge from the drum VA1 Varistor Varistor HDD1 1 Hard disk Program Image storage H6 LCD1 H5 ...

Page 745: ...it Name Parts No H1 H2 Fixing film unit iR2230 2230F 2830 FM2 0293 100V FM2 0358 120V FM2 0359 230V Fixing film unit iR3530 FM2 1793 120V FM2 1794 230V H4 FK2 0375 100V FK2 0376 230V ELCB1 FH7 7626 ELCB2 FH7 7625 Notat ion Parts No Main controller PCB DC controller PCB LA1 FK2 0368 J302B VA1 FL2 3265 HDD 1 WM2 5216 J1026 SVR1 FM2 2768 J302B SP1 FM2 0342 Notati on Name Description ...

Page 746: ...ription 1 reader controller PCB FG3 3765 controls the reader unit ADF 2 control panel CPU PCB FG6 8938 controls the control panel 3 control pen key PCB FG3 2834 controls the inputs from the keypad keys 4 control panel inverter PCB FG6 8939 controls the activation of the backlight of the LCD HDD1 H1 H2 LA1 VA1 SVR1 ELCB1 ELCB2 H4 SP1 ...

Page 747: ...pseudo CI PCB FM2 2773 generates the pseudo CI signal 6 BD PCB scanner unit FM2 0276 iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F FM2 0334 iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F generates the BD signal 7 NCU PCB FM2 2790 controls the line switching operation 9 fax board PCB FM2 2789 control the fax unit 10 laser driver PCB scanner unit FM2 0276 iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F FM2 0334 iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F controls the laser unit drive 11...

Page 748: ... 17 accessories power supply PCB FK2 0339 accessorizes power supply 18 environment switch PCB FG3 2797 heater power supply switch 19 DC controller PCB FM2 2767 controls the printer unit accessory 20 main controller PCB FM2 3226 processes output image data for the printer unit 21 expansion bus PCB FM2 2804 connection interface 22 USB board FM2 3010 USB interface 23 all night power supply PCB FK2 03...

Page 749: ...4 14 43 F 14 22 14 3 7 2 PCBs 0009 2934 iR3530 Reader Unit T 14 26 Ref Name Parts No Function 1 Reader controller PCB FG3 3765 Controls the reader unit ADF 2 3 4 12 14 16 23 18 13 19 20 6 10 15 17 21 22 11 9 7 5 ...

Page 750: ...1 Arrestor PCB 100 V FM2 2973 Protects against high voltage 2 Cassette 1 size detection PCB FM2 2770 Cassette 1 size detection 3 Cassette 2 size detection PCB FM2 2770 Cassette 2 size detection 4 Cassette size detection relay PCB FM2 2771 Cassette size detection relay 5 Pseudo CI PCB FM2 2773 Pseudo CI signal generation 6 BD PCB Scanner unit FM2 0276 iR2230 2230F 2830 FM2 0334 iR3530 BD signal gen...

Page 751: ...ply PCB FM2 2764 Controller power supply 16 AC driver PCB Main power supply PCB unit FM2 0260 100 115V FM2 02458 230V AC drive 17 Accessories power supply PCB FK2 0338 100 115V FK2 0339 230V Accessories power supply 18 Environment switch PCB 100 230 V FG3 2797 Heater power switch 19 DC controller PCB FM2 2767 Controls the printer unit accessories 20 Main controller PCB FM2 3226 Processes image dat...

Page 752: ...sistors VR Light Emitting Diodes and Check Pins by PCB 0007 6841 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Of the variable resistors VR light emitting diodes LED and check pins found in the machine those that are needed when servicing the machine in the field are discussed 2 3 4 12 14 16 23 1 18 13 19 11 9 7 5 20 6 10 15 17 21 22 ...

Page 753: ... used in the field 14 3 8 2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker 0007 7795 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Points to Note When Checking the Output of a PCB Normally an AC voltage is applied to the terminal of the leakage breaker 1 Take care not to touch it when making a check F 14 25 14 3 8 3 All Night Power Supply PCB 0007 6843 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 F 14 26 J691 J692 J601 J693...

Page 754: ...T 14 28 Notation Description VR201 for factory use ...

Page 755: ...Chapter 15 Self Diagnosis ...

Page 756: ......

Page 757: ...2 Error Codes 15 32 15 4 Jam Code 15 41 15 4 1 Jam Cover printer unit 15 41 15 4 2 Jam Code finisher related 15 42 15 4 3 Jam Code ADF related 15 43 15 5 Alarm Code 15 46 15 5 1 Alarm Code 15 46 15 5 2 Alarm Code 15 46 15 6 Finisher Saddle Finisher Error Codes 15 47 15 6 1 Error Code in Detail finisher puncher 15 47 15 6 2 Error Code Detail finisher puncher 15 72 15 7 DADF Error Codes 15 82 15 7 1...

Page 758: ......

Page 759: ...ase full waste toner case full sensor error E020 toner clogging between sub hopper and developing assembly E024 developing assembly connector disconnection E025 hopper motor bottle motor error E032 NE controller counter error E064 power supply voltage error high voltage E100 BD interval error E110 scanner motor error E191 communication error for high voltage power supply E202 CIS home position det...

Page 760: ...ray ascent error upper tray ascent error E542 lower tray ascent error E577 paddle error E584 shutter error E590 punching error E591 puncher dust sensor error E592 punch horizontal registration sensor error E593 punch shift error E5F0 saddle paper positioning error E5F1 saddle paper folding error E5F2 saddle guide error E5F3 saddle alignment error E5F4 saddle rear stapling error E5F5 saddle front s...

Page 761: ...munication error for pedestal E717 communication error for NE controller E719 coin vendor error E730 PDL software error E732 scanner communication error E733 printer communication error E740 Ether board error E743 DDI communication error E744 language file boot ROM error E745 TokenRing board error E746 accessories board wrong model error E748 controller board and SDRAM size mismatch E805 fan error...

Page 762: ...ontrol does not end 30 sec after the start of power supply Reset the condition in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Replace the main thermistor Replace the DC controller PCB E001 The temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high 0000 The reading of the main thermistor is 250 deg C or more continuously for 200 msec Reset the condition in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Replace t...

Page 763: ...ec with the reading of the main thermistor indicating 100 deg C or more Reset the condition in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Replace the main thermistor Replace the DC controller PCB E010 The rotation of the main motor is faulty 0001 Detection is executed every 100 msec after the start of motor rotation however the drive detection signal is absent for 2 sec Replace the main motor Replace ...

Page 764: ...uously for 100 msec Replace the developing assembly toner sensor Connect the connector Replace the DC controller PCB E025 The hopper motor or the bottle motor is faulty 0000 The sub hopper toner sensor connection detection signal is absent for 100 msec 10 times in sequence Replace the sub hopper toner sensor Connect the connector Replace the detection PCB 0001 While the hopper motor is rotating th...

Page 765: ...the high voltage power supply Replace the DC controller PCB E100 The BD interval is outside a specific range 0001 After the machine has become ready for image formation i e the scanner motor is ready for operation and the laser has been turned on an error has occurred 50 times or more BD error Replace the laser unit Replace the DC controller PCB Check the wiring E110 The scanner motor is faulty 00...

Page 766: ...he CIS is faulty 0001 During shading operation the intensity is below a specific level Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable Replace the following as necessary flexible cable CIS reader controller PCB 0002 During DF stream reading the sheet to sheet light intensity is faulty Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable Replace the following as necessary flexible cable CIS reader control...

Page 767: ... detected for 500 msec or more Replace the AC driver PCB Replace the DC controller PCB E315 There is an error in image data 0007 There is an error in JBIG encoding Turn off and then back on the power 000d There is an error in JBIG decoding Turn off and then back on the power E602 There is an error on the hard disk 0001 Cause An HDD detection error has occurred The HDD cannot be detected The HDD do...

Page 768: ... judgment based on functions of PDL team that are called in Timing of Detection once at bootable startup See the details under 602 01XX DOSDEV is faulty See the details under 602 02XX FSTDEV is faulty See the details under 602 03XX DOSDEV2 is faulty See the details under 602 04XX FSTPDEV is faulty See the details under 602 05XX DOSDEV3 is faulty See the details under 602 06XX PDLDEV is faulty See ...

Page 769: ...ween the fax control PCB 2 line and main controller PCB 0001 An attempt to set mode for the fax device has failed 1 Check the connection of the cable between the fax control PCB 2 line and the main controller PCB 2 Replace the ROM DIMM of the fax control PCB 2 line 3 Replace the fax control PCB 2 line 4 Replace the main controller PCB E710 There is an error in the initialization of the IPC 0001 Th...

Page 770: ...IPC An error has occurred and the IPC communication remains disabled Check the cable thereafter reset the condition in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E719 There is a coin vendor error 0001 The coin vendor is not connected when the power is turned on although it was connected before the power was turned off because of an error Check the cable thereafter reset the condition in service mode C...

Page 771: ...e again 9004 There is an error in the communication PAI with an external controller 1 Turn on the power once main 2 Check the connection of the open I F board and the cable 3 Replace the board for the external controller open I F 4 Replace the main board 9005 There is a fault in the connector of the vide cable to the external controller 1 Turn on the power once main 2 Check the connection of the o...

Page 772: ...er 2 Check the power supply of the printer to see if initialization takes place at startup 3 Replace the DC controller or the main board E740 There is an error on the Ether board 0002 The MAC address is illegal Replace the LAN card E743 There is an error in the DDI communication 0000 An SCI error has occurred The received data is faulty A reception timeout condition has occurred An SEQ timeout err...

Page 773: ...n error in the acquisition setting of board information 1 Replace the TokenRing board 0004 There is a connection error 1 Check the connection of the cable 2 Replace the cable 3 Check the power source of the MAU 4 Replace the MAU 5 Replace the TokenRing board 0005 Other Errors E746 The accessories board is of the wrong type 0003 At startup a board for a different model has been detected Replace the...

Page 774: ...plied 3 If the symptom still exists after the foregoing replace the HDD re install the system software If the symptom still exists replace the main board 0 0 0 2 The system software for the main CPU does not exist 1 Start up in safe mode and format the HDD using the SST all then re initial the system software System Language RUI then turn off and then back on the main power switch 2 If the symptom...

Page 775: ...d 1 1 Set CHK TYPE 0 and execute HD CHECK 50 to 50 min thereafter turn off and then back on the main power switch 2 If the symptom still exists after the foregoing start up in safe mode then format the HDD full using the SST and re install the system software System Language RUI and turn off and then back on the main power switch 3 If the symptom still exists after the foregoing suspect a fault on...

Page 776: ...HDD and replace the HDD and re install the system software XX YY X X CHK TYP E Partiti on in questio n Descripti on 01 02 03 11 21 13 25 10 12 14 22 23 24 At startup During routine operation Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy 1 1 DOSD EV General data storage area 1 5 9 10 11 12 2 1 FSTDE V Image data storage area e g Box 1 5 9 10 11 12 3 1 DOSD EV2 Image thumbnail display data area e ...

Page 777: ...le color correction info file for PDL function 1 5 9 10 11 12 7 4 DOSD EV4 Firmware storage area address book filter 2 6 9 10 11 12 8 4 BOOT DEV Firmware storage area System Language RUI 3 8 9 10 11 12 XX YY X X CHK TYP E Partiti on in questio n Descripti on 01 02 03 11 21 13 25 10 12 14 22 23 24 At startup During routine operation Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy ...

Page 778: ...HDD formatting with SST 1 1 DOSDE V General data storage area Entire collection of image data e g Box Possible 4 partitions simul taneously FSTDEV specified 4 partitions simul taneously Possible however selection of a specific partition is not allowed requiring deletion of all data After formatting the system software must be downloaded XX YY X X CHK TYP E Partiti on in questio n Descripti on 01 0...

Page 779: ...downloaded 3 1 DOSDE V2 Image thumbnail display data area e g Box Entire collection of image data e g Box Possible 4 partitions simul taneously FSTDEV specified 4 partitions simul taneously Possible however selection of a specific partition is not allowed requiring deletion of all data After formatting the system softwaremust be downloaded X X CHK TYP E Partition in question Descriptio n Typical i...

Page 780: ...e must be downloaded 5 2 DOSDE V3 General file storage area user settings logs PDL spool image data control info Items that are relatively less critical Possible DOSDEV 3 specified Possible however selection of a specific partition is not allowed requiring deletion of all data After formatting the system software must be downloaded X X CHK TYP E Partition in question Descriptio n Typical item dele...

Page 781: ...formatting the system softwaremust be downloaded 7 4 DOSDE V4 Firmware storage area address book filter Address book Not possible DOSDEV 4 specified Possible however selection of a specific partition is not allowed requiring deletion of all data After formatting the system softwaremust be downloaded X X CHK TYP E Partition in question Descriptio n Typical item deleted HDD formattin g by HD CLEAR N...

Page 782: ...tion of all data After formatting the system software must be downloaded 9 5 DOSDE V5 For future expansion None in particular Possible DOSDEV 5 specified Possible however selection of a specific partition is not allowed requiring deletion of all data After formatting the system software must be downloaded F F 0 Not identified Entire HDD check on faulty sector and recovery X X CHK TYP E Partition i...

Page 783: ... the SST and re install the system software System Language RUI Thereafter turn off and then back on the main power 3 01 The ongoing write operation has been suspended at startup To run a recovery session for the boot partition you will have to use safe mode in combination with the SST 1 Set 0 for TYPE TYPE and execute HDD CHECK 40 to 50 min Thereafter turn off and the back on the power 2 If the s...

Page 784: ...ently i e you will not the able to execute HDD CLEAR from service mode 1 If possible ask the user to back up the address book data using the RUI 2 From service mode start download mode then execute full formatting using the SST and re install the system software System Language RUI Thereafter turn off and the back on the main power 7 02 A file system error has occurred This type of error is highly...

Page 785: ... Works system error has occurred 1 Check the cable and power supply connectors 2 If the symptom still exits after the foregoing start up in safe mode and execute full formatting using the SST and re install the system software System Language RUI Thereafter turn off and then back on the main power 3 If the symptom still exits after the foregoing suspect a fault on the HDD and replace the HDD and r...

Page 786: ...he ongoing write operation has been suspended There is a likelihood of the presence of damage to the file data on the HDD e g Box 1 Set 0 for TYPE TYPE and execute HDD CHECK 40 to 50 min Thereafter turn off and then back on the power 2 If the symptom still exits after the foregoing set 1 for TYPE TYPE and execute HDD CLEAR In the case of DOSDEV4 or BOOTDEV execute formatting and re installation on...

Page 787: ...te suspended sector happens to be a critical sector that holds a control area there is no way of repairing it you will have to execute HDD formatting Replacing the HDD 1 Turn off the main switch 2 Connect the new HDD 3 Start up the machine in safe mode 4 Connect the SST and execute full formatting 5 Using the SST download the system software System Language RUI 6 Turn off and then back on the powe...

Page 788: ... try again If browsing is still not permitted select a different server NetWare is in use Try again later NetWare is printing using PSeve or NDSPServer not permitting browsing Wait until NetWare finishes printing then try again The layer in question at the target is too deep to browse The number of characters is in excess of the number allowed The layer in question cannot be specified Specify a di...

Page 789: ...sword or the settings If the login information of the LDAP server is set to use or use security authentication the user name or the password is wrong In user mode check the LDAP server settings user name password If the login information of the LDAP server is set to use security authentication the domain name is wrong In user mode check the LDAP server settings domain name A timeout condition has ...

Page 790: ...r mode the LDAP server settings server LDAP version and character code is set for version 3 however the LDAP server is operating for version 2 In user mode set the LDAP server settings so that the LDAP server version and the character code are both version 2 Cause Remedy 001 There is a paper or original jam Remove the jammed paper or original 003 A communication lasting longer than a specific peri...

Page 791: ...s of the group address selected as the forwarding target may have been deleted or there is no more than a user box thus causing the transmission to fail Try transmitting once again The attempt to transmit to an address registered in the address book has failed because the address has been removed from the address table while in wait for transmission Try once again 037 There is a shortage of memory...

Page 792: ...off and then back on the main power 704 An error has occurred while an attempt is made to obtain address information from the address book Check the settings of the address and try once again if the operation is still not normal try turning off and then back on the main power 705 The image data size is in excess of the upper limit imposed on transmission data size set in user mode thus causing sus...

Page 793: ...onnection of the network 753 A TCP IP error has occurred in the course of e mail transmission e g socket select error Check the condition of the network cable and the connector If the operation does not return to normal try turning off and then back on the main power of the machine 754 The server has not been started up for transmission or the network is disconnected Or the target settings are wro...

Page 794: ...is prohibited Change the setting of the file server so that overwriting may be permitted In relation to transmission file server the folder name or the password that has been specified is wrong Check the address setting 802 In the system control setup user mode the settings of the SMTP server for e mail i fax are wrong The setting of the DNS server is wrong The attempt to connect to the DNS server...

Page 795: ...le server is being printed you will not be able to log in to the server in question Wait a while and then try once again Or change the NetWare server settings of the target or stop PServer 818 The data that has been received is in a format that does not permit printing Ask the source to change the file format and transmit it once again 819 The data that has been received is of a type that cannot b...

Page 796: ...s lower than the size permitted by the mail server 3 Check the condition of the mail server DNS server and network 831 An attempt to receive i fax in SMTP has failed because of the reception printing range settings made as part of the IP address range setting in user mode Change the reception printing range settings made as part of the IP address range setting in user mode 832 In user mode the e m...

Page 797: ...tings user mode 841 In relation to an attempt for transmission for e mail i fax there is no coding algorithm that may be used in common with the mail server 1 Set SSL to OFF as part of the network settings under system control settings user mode 2 Add a coding algorithm that may be used in common mail server settings 842 In relation to an attempt for transmission of e mail i fax a request has been...

Page 798: ...f while a job is being executed causing an error Check to see that the main power switch is on as necessary try once again 899 The transmission of e mail or i fax has ended However the transmission has gone through multiple servers and there is no way of finding out whether the transmission has reached the target 1 Check with the target to see if the transmission has arrived 2 Check to see if an e...

Page 799: ...y sensor PS2 cassette pedestall xx05 registration sensor PS9 xx06 xx07 fixing delivery sensor PS13 xx08 No 1 delivery sensor PS14 xx09 No 2 delivery sensor PS1A 2 3 delivery unit xx0A reversal sensor PS4A 2 3 delivery unit xx0B No 3 delivery sensor PS5A 2 3 delivery unit xx0C duplexing assembly feed sensor PS3A 2 3 delivery unit xx0D duplex feed sensor PS17 xx0E deck retry sensor PS6D side paper d...

Page 800: ...04 delivery path sensor feed stationary jam PI4 1200 timing jam PI3 1500 stapler jam STP 1300 power on jam PI3 PI4 1400 door open jam DOOR 1644 punch jam LED5 PTR5 1645 punch power on jam LED5 PTR5 1791 saddle feed sensor feed delay jam PI8S PI19S PI20S 1792 saddle delivery sensor feed delay jam PI11S 1793 saddle inlet sensor feed delay jam PI22S 17A1 saddle feed sensor feed stationary jam P18S PI...

Page 801: ... registration sensor delay PI2 The registration sensor does not detect paper with 1 5 sec after pickup At time of reversal the registration sensor does not detect paper even after the read motor has rotated for a specific period of time 0004 registration sensor stationary PI2 After the registration sensor has gone on it does not go off even when the paper has been moved for 500 mm 700 mm if in ext...

Page 802: ...ead sensor stationary PI3 The 1st original has been identified as a read sensor stationary jam 0047 1st sheet delivery sensor delay PI3 PI4 The 1st original has been identified as a delivery sensor delay jam 0048 1st sheet delivery sensor stationary PI4 The 1st original has been identified as a delivery sensor stationary jam 0071 timing error TIMING NG The software sequence fails to end normally w...

Page 803: ...I3 PI4 The presence of paper is detected inside the feeder when the 1st sheet is being picked up 0095 pickup fault PICKUP NG With no original in the tray the pickup signal is received for 2 sec Code Jam Sensor notation Description ...

Page 804: ...ette retry alarm 3rd cassette retry alarm 4th cassette retry alarm optional deck retry alarm 61 finisher 0001 no staple 62 saddle stitcher 0001 no stitch staple 65 puncher 0001 punch waste case full Location code Alarm Code 02 Scanner 0002 alerts to soiling on glass in stream reading mode 04 Pickup feeder 0008 0011 0012 0013 0014 0018 accessory deck lifter error 1st cassette retry alarm 2nd casset...

Page 805: ...addle unit Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the saddle controller PCB Check the cable 0003 fault in communicatio n between finisher and punch unit Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the punch drive PCB Check the cable E505 0001 fault in the backup memory of the finisher common among all finishers fault in the data stored in backup memory Turn off the main power Check the wiring...

Page 806: ...cer is shifted from home position the belt escape home position sensordoesnot go off within 1 5 sec E514 0001 fault in trailing edge assist motor Finisher Q3 Q4 The home positionsensor does not go off even when the trailing edge assist motor has rotated for a specific period of time Replace the finisher control PCB Replace the trailing edge assist motor 0002 The home positionsensor does not go on ...

Page 807: ...pecific period of time E530 8001 Rear alignment error Finisher S1 The home positionsensor does not go on within 2000 msec after the start of operation when the rear aligning plate is shifted to home position Replace the finisher controlled PCB Replace the rear alignment motor Check the rear aligning plate drive mechanism Check the rear alignment home position sensor 8002 The home positionsensor do...

Page 808: ...n sensor 0002 The home positionsensor does not go on even when the front alignment motorhasbeen rotated for a specific period of time E531 8001 Stapler error Finisher S1 At time of staple jam recovery the home position sensordoesnot go on with 500 msec after the start of reverse rotation of the stapler motor Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the stapler Check the harness 8002 The home po...

Page 809: ...otor has rotated for a specific period of time E532 8001 Stapler shift error Finisher S1 The stapler slide home positionsensor does not go on within 11 sec when the stapler is shifted to home position Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the stapler shift motor Check the stapler shift home position sensor Check the harness 8002 The stapler slide home positionsensor does not go off within 1 ...

Page 810: ...even when the stapler shift motor has rotated for a specific period of time E535 0001 Swing cam error Finisher S1 The home positionsensor does not go off within 1000 msec after the start of operation when the swing arm is shifted from home position Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the swing cam motor Check the swing cam home position sensor Check the harness 0002 The home positionsensor...

Page 811: ... swing motor has rotated for a specific period of time E537 8001 Front alignment error Finisher S1 The home positionsensor does not go on within 2 0 sec when the front aligning plate is moved to home position Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the front alignment motor Check the front aligning plate drive mechanism Check the front alignment home position sensor 8002 The home positionsenso...

Page 812: ...n the rear aligning plate is moved form home position E540 8002 Stack tray motor error Finisher S1 The operation to detect the paper surface of the stack tray does not end within 1 0 sec Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the tray ascent descent motor Check the stack tray drive mechanism Check the paper surface sensor 8003 An abnormal combinationof sensor states has been detected Replace ...

Page 813: ...finisher controller PCB 0004 Safety switch activation Check the No 1 tray closed detecting switch Replace the finisher controller PCB E542 0002 Lower tray ascent descent motor error Finisher Q3 Q4 Lower tray ascent descent motor clock error Replace the No 2 tray shift motor Replace the finisher controller PCB Check the tray ascent descent mechanism 0003 Area error Replace the No 2 tray shift area ...

Page 814: ... home position sensordoesnot go off within 1 0 sec when the paddle is moved to home position E584 0001 Shutter unit error Finisher Q3 Q4 The shutter open sensor does not go off i e the shutter does not close Check the stack edging motor Check the open close clutch Check the shutter home position sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 The shutter open sensor does not go on i e the shutter ...

Page 815: ...nch driver PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 Error in light receiving voltage while light is not emitted E592 0001 Paper trailing edge sensor horizontal sensor error Error in light receiving voltage when light is emitted trailing edge sensor Check the paper trailing edge sensor Check the horizontal registration sensor Check the punch driver PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB E592 0...

Page 816: ...ror in light receiving voltage when light is emitted horizontal registration sensor 2 Check the paper training edge sensor Check the horizontal registration sensor Check the punch driver PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB E592 0006 Paper trailing edge sensor registration sensor error Error in light receiving voltage when light is not emitted horizontal registration sensor 2 Check the paper tr...

Page 817: ...the finisher controller PCB E592 000A Paper trailing edge sensor registration sensor error Error in light receiving voltage when light is not emitted horizontal registration sensor 4 Check the paper trailing edge sensor Check the horizontal registration sensor Check the punch drive PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB E593 0001 Punch shift motor error The light receiving voltage home positionse...

Page 818: ...sor P17S Check the paper positioning plate motor Check the paper positioning plate home position sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB Check the paper positioning plate drive mechanism 0002 The paper positioning plate home positionsensor doest not go off when the paper positioning platemotorhas been drivenfor 1 sec Paper positioning plate motor M4S paper positioning plate home positionsensor ...

Page 819: ...sensor P14S Check the paper folding motor Check the paper folding motor clock sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB Check the paper folding plate drive mechanism 0002 The state of the paper folding home position sensor doest not change whenthe paper folding motor has been driven for 3 sec Paper folding motor M2S paper folding motor clock sensor P14S Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 820: ...guide home position sensor PI13S Check the guide motor Check the guide home position sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB Check the guide drive mechanism 0002 The guide home position sensordoesnot go off when the guide motorhasbeen driven for 1 sec Guide motor M3S guide home position sensor PI13S Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 821: ... aligning plate home position sensor PI5S Check the alignment motor Check the alignment home position sensor Check the aligning plate drive mechanism Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 The aligning plate home positionsensor does not go off when the alignment motor hasbeen driven for 1 sec Alignment motor M5S aligning plate home position sensor PI5S Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 822: ...tor rear M6S stitching home positionsensor rear MS5S Replace the stitcher rear Check the harness Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 The stitching home position sensordoesnot go off when the stitch motor rear has been rotated in normal direction for 0 5 sec or more Stitch motor rear MS stitching home positionsensor rear MS5S Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 823: ...r front M7S stitching home positionsensor front MS7S Replace the stitcher front Check the harness Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 The stitching home position sensordoesnot go off when the switch motor front has been rotated in normal direction for 0 5 sec or more Stitch motor front M7S stitching home positionsensor front MS7S Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 824: ...n sensor PI14S Check the paper butting plate motor Check the paper butting plate home position sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB E5F6 0002 Saddle butting error The paper butting plate home position sensordoesnot go off when the paper butting plate motorhasbeen driven for 80 msec or more Paper butting plate motor M8S paper butting plate home position sensor PI14S Code Detail code Name Dete...

Page 825: ...ng platemotorhas dropped below a specific value paper butting plate motor M8S paper butting plate motor clock sensor PI1S Check the paper butting plate motor Check the paper butting plate motor clock sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 826: ...ing edge sensor PI15S Check the paper butting plate motor Check the paper butting plate leading edge sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB E5F6 0005 Saddle butting error The paper butting plate leading edge sensordoesnot go on when the paper butting platemotorhas been drivenfor 0 3 sec Paper butting plate more M8S paper butting plate leading edge sensor PI15S Code Detail code Name Detection R...

Page 827: ...sor has been identified as being disconnected Connector of paper butting plate home positionsensor PI14S Connect the connector of the paper butting plate home position sensor Check the harness Replace the finisher controller PCB 0003 The connector of the paper butting plate leading edge sensor has been identified as being disconnected Connector of paper butting plate leading edge sensor PI15S Conn...

Page 828: ...sed inlet cover sensor PI9S nt cover open closed sensor PI2S delivery cover sensor PI3S Or the front over switch MS2S or the delivery cover switch MS3S is open Inlet cover switch MS1S front cover switch MS2S delivery cover switch MS3S Check the inlet cover switch Check the inlet cover sensor Check the front cover open closed sensor Check the delivery cover sensor Replace the finisher controller PC...

Page 829: ...ng their respective coversasbeing closed inlet cover sensor PI9S front cover open closed sensor PI2S delivery cover sensor PI3S front cover switch MS2S delivery cover switch MS3S Check the front cover switch Check the inlet cover sensor Check the front cover open closed sensor Check the delivery cover sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 830: ...t machine with the following sensors identifying their respective coversasbeing closed inlet cover sensor PI9S front cover open closed sensor PI2S delivery cover sensor PI3S delivery cover switch MS3S Check the delivery cover switch Check the inlet cover sensor Check the inlet cover sensor Check the front cover open closed sensor Check the delivery cover sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB ...

Page 831: ... between the finisher and the punch unit Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the punch driver PCB Check the cable E505 0001 Finisher backup memory error There is an error in the data stored in the backup memory Turn off the main power and check the following DC controller PCB and finisher PCB wiring 24V fuse Thereafter turn on the main power 0002 There is an error in the punch unit EEPROM ...

Page 832: ...ot go off within 1 5 sec E530 8001 Rear alignment error Finisher S1 When the rear aligning plate is moving to home position the HP sensor is not identified as being ON within 2000 msec after the start of the movement Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the rear alignment motor Check the rear aligning plate drive unit Check the rear alignment HP sensor 8002 When the rear aligning plate ismo...

Page 833: ... being OFF within 500 msec after the start of staple motor drive E532 8001 Stapler shift error Finisher S1 When the stapler is moving to home position the stapler slide HP sensordoesnot go on within 11 sec Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the stapler shift motor Check the stapler shift home position sensor Check the harness 8002 When the stapler is moving from home position the stapler ...

Page 834: ...ving from home position the swing cam HPsensordoes not go off within 1 0 sec E537 8001 Front alignment error Finisher S1 When the front aligning plate is moving to home position the front alignment HP sensordoesnot go on within 2 0 sec Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the front alignment motor Check the front aligning plate drive unit Check the front alignment HP sensor 8002 When the fr...

Page 835: ...r PCB Check the stack tray upper limit sensor Check the stack tray lower limit sensor Check the stack tray paper surface sensor Check the stack tray lower paper surface sensor E577 8001 Paddle error Finisher S1 When the paddle is moving to home position the paddle HP sensordoesnot go on within 1 5 sec Check the paddle motor Check the paddle home position sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB ...

Page 836: ...ere is an error in the voltage oflight reception while light is shined Check the dust case full sensor Check the punch driver PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 There is an error in the voltage oflight reception while light is not shined E592 0001 Paper trailing edge sensor horizontal registration sensor error There is an error in the voltage oflight reception while light is shined trail...

Page 837: ...sensor Check the punch driver PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB E592 0004 Paper trailing edge sensor registration sensor error There is an error in the voltage oflight reception while light is not shined horizontal registration sensor 1 Check the paper trailing edge sensor Check the horizontal registration sensor Check the punch driver PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB E592 0005 Paper ...

Page 838: ...tration sensor Check the punch drive PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB E592 0008 Paper trailing edge sensor registration sensor error There is an error in the voltage oflight reception while light is not shined horizontal registration sensor 3 Check the paper trailing edge sensor Check the horizontal registration sensor Check the punch drive PCB Replace the finisher control PCB E592 0009 Pap...

Page 839: ...ch drive PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB E593 0001 Punch shift motor error The light reception voltage HP sensordoesnot go off when light is shined Check the horizontal registration motor Check the horizontal registration HP sensor Check the punch driver PCB Check the finisher controller PCB Check the punch shift mechanism 0002 The light reception voltage HP sensordoesnot go on while light...

Page 840: ...tor Replace the reader controller PCB Replace the ADF controller PCB 0002 Reception status error Disconnect and then connect the connector Replace the reader control PCB Replace the ADF control PCB 0003 Reception interrupt error Disconnect and then connect the connector Replace the reader controlled PCB Replace the ADF controller PCB E490 0001 Wrong DF The installed DF is not of a supported type I...

Page 841: ...Chapter 16 Service Mode ...

Page 842: ......

Page 843: ... CON 16 15 16 3 3 R CON 16 19 16 3 4 FEEDER 16 21 16 3 5 SORTER 16 22 16 4 ADJUST 16 34 16 4 1 COPIER 16 34 16 4 1 1 Copier List 16 34 16 4 2 FEEDER 16 44 16 4 2 1 FEEDER List 16 44 16 4 3 SORTER 16 45 16 4 3 1 Sorter List 16 45 16 5 FUNCTION 16 46 16 5 1 COPIER 16 46 16 5 1 1 Copier List 16 46 16 5 2 FEEDER 16 59 16 5 2 1 Feeder List 16 59 16 6 OPTION 16 63 16 6 1 COPIER 16 63 16 6 1 1 Copier Lis...

Page 844: ...Contents 16 8 1 COPIER 16 102 16 8 1 1 Copier List 16 102 ...

Page 845: ...de is divided into the following 7 types Initial screen Level 1 Main intermediate item screen Level 1 Sub item screen Level 1 Sub item screen Level 1 User screen Initial screen Level 2 Reset key Previous next page 2 8 Select a main item from the top of screen The corresponding intermediate items are then displayed and can be selected Select an item Main intermediate item screen Level 2 Sub item sc...

Page 846: ...e control panel 2 Press the 2 and 8 keys of the keypad at the same time 3 Press the asterisk key on the control panel In response to the foregoing key operations the machine will bring up the following Initial screen F 16 3 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD DISPLAY I O ADJUST FUNCTION OPTION TEST COUNTER status indication mode input output indication mode adjustment mode operation inspection mode setting...

Page 847: ...nt values are recorded in their respective service labels If you have replaced the reader controller PCB or the DC controller PCB or if you have initialized the RAM the adjustment values for ADJUST and OPTION will return to their default settings If there has been any change in a service mode item be sure to update its setting indicated on the service label As necessary make use of the space in th...

Page 848: ...F 16 6 16 1 7 4th Item Screen 0007 8140 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD Initial item Touch to select an item VERSION USER ACC STS ANALOG CST STS JAM ERR 2nd item Touch to select an item 3rd item Touch to select an item Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display ...

Page 849: ... absent ALERM alarm condition present READY JAM SERVICE WAITING DOOR COPYING ERROR Machine States Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O PREV NEXT OK xxxxx yyyyy aaaaa bbbbb toggles between and key press it to stop the ongoing operation stores input value numerical input range value before change Stop key press to clear an input Clear key press to start copying without leaving service mode Start ...

Page 850: ... FEEDER ROM version of the DADF controller circuit board 1 SORTER ROM version of the finisher controller circuit board 1 FAX ROM version of the fax board 1 NIB Version of the network software 1 SDL STCH ROM version of the saddle stitcher controller circuit board 1 MN CONT ROM version of the main controller circuit board 1 DIAG DVC ROM version of the self diagnostic device 1 RUI Version of the remo...

Page 851: ...Hungarian language file 2 LANG KO Version of the Korean language file 2 LANG NL Version of the Dutch language file 2 LANG NO Version of the Norwegian language file 2 LANG PL Version of the Polish language file 2 LANG PT Version of the Portuguese language file 2 LANG RU Version of the Russian language file 2 LANG SL Version of the Slovenian language file 2 LANG SV Version of the Swedish language fi...

Page 852: ... Connected 1 RAM Capacity of the memory on the main controller circuit board 256 MB 512 MB 1 COINROBO Coin vendor connection status 0 Not connected 1 Connected 1 NIB Network board connection status 0 No board connected 1 Ethernet board connected 2 Token ring board connected 3 Ethernet board and token ring board connected 1 PS PCL Not used 1 NETWARE Netware firmware installation status 0 Not instal...

Page 853: ...UM In machine humidity environment sensor Unit RH 1 ABS HUM Water content environment sensor Unit g 1 DR TEMP Photoconductor drum ambient temperature drum sensor Unit deg C 1 FIX C Fixing heater temperature main thermistor Unit deg C 1 FIX E Fixing heater edge temperature sub thermistor Unit deg C 1 COPIER DISPLAY CST STS Sub item Description Level WIDTH MF Paper width on the manual feedtray Unit ...

Page 854: ...o Jam sequential number 1 to 50 The oldest jam has the greatest number DATE Jam occurrence date TIME1 Jam occurrence time TIME2 Jam reset time L Location of the jam 0 2 0 host machine 1 Feeder 2 Finisher CODE Jam Code P Paper feed position 1 Cassette 1 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3 4 Cassette 4 5 Side paper deck 6 Manual feed tray 7 Duplex section CNTR Software counter value of the paper feed stage SI...

Page 855: ...inisher 3 Not used 4 Reader unit 5 Printer unit 6 Various PDL board 7 Fax board P Not used HV STS T 16 5 CCD COPIER DISPLAY HV STS Sub item Description Leve PRIMARY Primary charge current at photoconductor drum Registrationance detection control APVC Unit uA 1 TR Transfer current setting for the job executed last Unit uA 1 BIAS Developing bias setting for the job executed last Unit V 1 TR V Voltag...

Page 856: ...urrence ENVRNT Environmental log display Changes of In machine temperature deg C humidity Fixing roller surface center temperature deg C are displayed as log data COPIER DISPLAY CCD Sub item Description Level TARGET R Red shooting target value 2 OFST CCD offset level adjustment value 2 GAIN CCD gain level adjustment value 2 MFIL Main scan MTF correction index 2 SFIL Subscan MTF correction index 2 ...

Page 857: ...AY T 16 9 Item Description No Error sequential number The oldest error has the greatest number DATE Data acquisition date TIME Data acquisition time D deg C In machine temperature E In machine humidity F deg C Fixing roller surface temperature FEEDER DISPLAY Sub item Description Level FEEDSIZE Document size detected by the feeder 1 TRY WIDE Distance between document width detection slides Paper wi...

Page 858: ...ges describe the items necessary items for market services only F 16 13 Screen interpretation F 16 14 Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display DC CON R CON FEEDER SORTER MN CONT Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display P001 P002 P003 P004 P005 P006 P007 P008 DC CON 1 3 READY xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx 0 7 ...

Page 859: ...r development 8 15 Not used P002 0 1 For development 2 3 Not used 4 5 For development 6 Thermistor Overheat 0 Relay OFF 7 High voltage board high voltage reset detection 0 High voltage reset detection 8 15 Not used P003 0 7 For development 8 15 Not used P004 0 7 For development 8 15 Not used P005 0 5 Not used 6 High voltage board high voltage reset request 0 High voltage reset request 7 For develo...

Page 860: ...up resistor switching 1 At low temperature 7 Fan half speed switching signal 1 Half speed 8 15 Not used P007 0 15 Not used P008 0 2 For development 3 Laser power select 4 Main motor 1 ON 5 7 For development 8 15 Not used P009 0 5 Not used 6 Polygon motor acceleration signal 7 15 For development P010 0 7 Not used P011 0 7 Not used P012 0 7 Not used P013 0 7 Not used P014 0 7 Not used P015 0 7 Not u...

Page 861: ... light 4 First paper ejection motor current switching 0 5 First paper ejection motor current switching 1 6 Heat exhaust fan F 1 ON 7 Pre exposure light quantity switching 1 Pre exposure with medium quantity of light P021 0 Manual feed detection sensor 0 Paper present 1 Toner detection 1 Toner remaining 2 Duplex transport sensor 1 Detected 3 Heat exhaust fan F lock detection 0 Locked 4 7 For develo...

Page 862: ...nt P028 0 4 For development 5 Cassette 1 paper sensor 1 No paper 6 Cassette 1 paper level A sensor 1 Half or less 7 Cassette 1 paper level B sensor 1 About 50 sheets or less P029 0 First paper ejection sensor 1 Detected 1 First paper ejection full sensor 0 Full 2 Fused paper ejection sensor 1 Detected 3 Front door sensor 0 OPEN 4 7 For development P030 0 1 For development 2 Paper feed door sensor ...

Page 863: ...Size sensor drive signal 1 ON P002 0 Not used 1 24V power supply monitor signal 0 Normal 2 Optical motor drive signal 1 Forward 0 Reverse 3 For development 4 For development 5 13V power supply monitor signal 0 Normal 6 Not used 7 For development P003 0 For development 1 For development 2 For development 3 For development 4 LED control signal 1 ON 5 For development 6 None 7 None P004 0 Document siz...

Page 864: ...ation 5 Platen sensor interrupt input 0 1 Platen closed 6 HP sensor interrupt input 1 HP 7 Platen sensor interrupt input 1 1 Platen closed P007 0 For development 1 For development 2 For development 3 For development 4 Optical motor driver power saving 0 active 5 ADF feed motor clock interrupt input Repetition of 0 1 6 ADF read motor clock interrupt input Repetition of 0 1 7 Not used P008 0 Lamp ON...

Page 865: ...play contents Remarks P001 0 Read sensor 1 Detected 1 Pre registration sensor 1 Detected P002 0 1 2 3 4 Stamp solenoid 1 ON 5 Clutch 1 ON 6 Document load LED 1 ON 7 P003 0 7 P004 0 Document detection sensor 1 Document present 1 Cover sensor 1 Closed 2 3 4 5 For development 6 For development 7 For development P005 0 End sensor 1 Paper present Address Bit Address Remarks ...

Page 866: ... 0 7 P010 0 7 For development P011 0 7 For development Address Controller Bit Display contents Remark s P001 STACKER 0 Entry transport motor A 1 Entry transport motor B 2 Entry transport motor A 3 Entry transport motor B 4 Entry transport motor current switching 0 0 ON 5 Entry transport motor current switching 1 0 ON 6 Entry transport bundle ejection motor standby signal 1 ON 7 Common solenoid ON ...

Page 867: ... 3 For development 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used P004 STACKER 0 Saddle connection detection signal 0 ON 1 Not used 2 Oscillating HP sensor 1 ON 3 Top cover sensor 0 ON 4 Front cover sensor 0 ON 5 Front cover interlock sensor 1 ON 6 Gear change HP sensor 1 ON 7 Not used P005 STACKER 0 For development 1 For development 2 Punch send request signal 0 ON 3 Saddle 13VON signal 1 ON 4 Not u...

Page 868: ...clock input P008 STACKER 0 Tray 3 paper detection sensor 1 ON 1 Tray 3 connection sensor 0 ON 2 High quality paper sensor 1 ON 3 Tray 1 interlock detection sensor 1 ON 4 Tray 1 area sensor 1 0 ON 5 Tray 1 area sensor 2 0 ON 6 Tray 1 area sensor 3 0 ON 7 Tray 1 paper detection sensor 1 ON P009 STACKER 0 Tray 1 shift motor CW 0 ON 1 Tray 1 shift motor enable 1 ON 2 Tray 1 shift motor power switching...

Page 869: ...aced solenoid 1 ON 4 Transport path sensor 1 ON 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used P012 STACKER 0 Gear change phase A 1 Gear change phase B 2 Gear change motor current switching 0 0 ON 3 Gear change motor current switching 1 0 ON 4 Not used 5 For development 6 For development 7 For development P013 STACKER 0 For development 1 Pre alignment HP sensor 1 ON 2 Pre alignment HP sensor 1 ON 3 Processing t...

Page 870: ...lignment phase B 2 Pre alignment motor current switching 0 0 ON 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used Address Controller Bit Display contents Remark s P016 STACKER 0 Rear end assist phase A 1 Rear end assist phase B 2 Rear end assist motor current switching 0 0 ON 3 Rear end assist motor current switching 1 0 ON 4 Rear end assist standby 1 ON 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used Addre...

Page 871: ...STACKER 0 Stapler slide current switching 0 0 ON 1 Stapler slide current switching 1 0 ON 2 Under bundle roller clutch 1 ON 3 Shutter clutch 1 ON 4 First paper ejection roller spaced solenoid 1 ON 5 Buffer paper rear end press solenoid 1 ON 6 Bundle out motor current switching 1 0 ON 7 Bundle out motor current switching 0 0 ON P020 STACKER 0 Bundle out motor phase A 1 Bundle out motor phase B 2 Bu...

Page 872: ... signal 0 ON 6 Not used 7 Fan error detection signal 0 ON P023 STACKER 0 FAN ON 1 ON 1 LED1 0 ON 2 LED2 0 ON 3 LED3 0 ON 4 FIN internal power supply ON 0 ON 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Return roller spaced solenoid 0 ON P024 SADDLE 0 Guide motor phase A 1 Guide motor phase B 2 Guide motor current switching 0 ON 3 Saddle transport motor current switching 4 Saddle transport motor phase A 5 Saddle transp...

Page 873: ...ed 7 Not used P027 SADDLE 0 Stapler current detection signal 1 ON 1 Stapler current detection signal 1 ON 2 Paper ejection cover sensor connector open 0 ON 3 Front cover sensor connector open 0 ON 4 Butting plate HP connector open 0 ON 5 Folding roller guide HP connector open 0 ON 6 Saddle stapler unit connector open 0 ON 7 Butting plate TOP connector open 0 ON P028 SADDLE 0 Inside staple detectio...

Page 874: ...r 1 ON 2 Entry cover open detection 0 ON 3 Saddle stapler open detection 1 ON 4 Butting plate HP sensor 1 ON 5 Butting plate TOP sensor 1 ON 6 Not used 7 Transport clock Address Controller Bit Display contents Remark s P031 SADDLE 0 Saddle tray paper detection sensor 0 ON 1 Paper positioning section paper detection sensor 0 ON 2 Crescent roller HP sensor 0 ON 3 Saddle paper ejection path sensor 0 ...

Page 875: ...switching flapper 1 1 ON 2 Saddle path switching flapper 2 1 ON 3 Intermediate transport solenoid 1 ON 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Entry path sensor 1 ON 7 Not used P034 SADDLE 0 Inside stapler motor forward rotation 0 ON 1 Inside stapler motor reverse rotation 0 ON 2 Front stapler motor forward rotation 0 ON 3 Not used 4 Folding roller HP connector open 0 ON 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used P035 SADD...

Page 876: ... ON 1 LED1 1 ON 2 LED2 1 ON 3 LED3 1 ON 4 LEDY 0 ON 5 TRAY_MTR_CUR 0 ON 6 TRAY_MTR_B 0 ON 7 TRAY_MTR_A 0 ON P038 PUNCHER 0 DIPSW1 0 ON 1 DIPSW2 0 ON 2 DIPSW3 0 ON 3 4 PCH OUT 5 Rear end sensor 1 ON 6 Punch encoder clock 7 Punch HP sensor 0 ON P039 PUNCHER 0 For development 1 For development 2 For development 3 4 5 6 7 Address Controller Bit Display contents Remark s ...

Page 877: ...otor CCW 0 ON 7 Punch motor CW 0 ON P041 PUNCHER 0 1 2 3 4 DIPSW4 0 ON 5 Horizontal registration motor CUR 0 ON 6 For development 7 P042 PUNCHER 0 LED1 0 ON 1 For development 2 For development 3 LED2 0 ON 4 Front cover sensor 0 ON 5 For development 6 PUSHSW2 0 ON 7 PUSHSW1 0 ON P043 PUNCHER 0 1 2 3 4 5 Top cover sensor 0 ON 6 7 Address Controller Bit Display contents Remark s ...

Page 878: ...er controller circuit board has been cleared enter the value from the service label COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY Sub item Description Level Adjusting the mage read start position If RAM on the reader controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label If the setting of this item has been changed enter the new value into the service label A...

Page 879: ...orward ADJ Y DF Adjusting the main scan position at DF flow read 1 Setting range 50 to 250 Default 144 Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0 1 mm outward STRD_POS Adjusting the CCD read start position at DF flow read 1 Setting range 1 to 200 Default 100 Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0 1 mm to left COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY Sub item Description...

Page 880: ...hen DF is in use Ordinary document read position 1 Setting range 1 to 2047 Default 1106 If an image error attributable to a dirty chart or other has occurred after the execution of COPIER FUNCTION DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 enter factory measurement data in this mode DFTAR2 R Entering a shading target value red when DF is in use Secondary document read position 1 Setting range 1 to 2047 Default 1138 If an ...

Page 881: ... unit displacement Matching the laser main scan 1 Setting range 360 to 440 Enter the delay value peculiar to the unit affixed to the unit at laser unit replacement POWER Adjusting the laser power 1 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP Sub item ...

Page 882: ...IER ADJUST BLANK Sub item Description Level BLANK T Entering an adjustment value for the chipping width at the front of an image 1 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 Setting a greater value increases the chipping width If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label BLANK B Entering an adjustment value for the ...

Page 883: ...e value from the label affixed to the casing of the new compound power circuit board COPIER ADJUST HV TR Sub item Description Level TR OFST Entering an output adjustment value for transfer charge current offset 1 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label TR SPP Entering ...

Page 884: ... 2 thick paper 3 envelope 4 tracing paper 5 OHP transparency 6 Postcard 7 Label paper 8 Bond paper TR ENV1 to TR ENV8 Setting environment at ATVC setting 2 Setting range 1 to 3 1 Category A low temperature Default 2 Category B room temperature 3 Category C high temperature TR DUP1 to TR DUP8 Setting simplex paper feed mode at ATVC setting 2 Setting range 1to 4 1 Simplex Default 2 Auto duplex feed ...

Page 885: ...the registration loop amount at duplex paper feed 1 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 45 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label RG HF SP Adjusting the registration clutch ON timing 1 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has bee...

Page 886: ...tering the basic paper width of the manual feed tray A6R 1 Setting range 0 to 1024 Default 175 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label For replacing the paper with detection VR or registering a new value for the firs time this service mode shall be executed by FUNCTION CST MF A4 Entering the basic paper...

Page 887: ...rd itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label FX FL LW Entering a fine adjustment value for the fixing film speed when low speed plain paper is used Make a fine adjustment of the target control speed for the fixing film speed when low speed plain paper is used 2 Setting range 3 to 3 Default 0 Unit ms If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itsel...

Page 888: ... 2 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 DK ADJ Y Entering a horizontal registration adjustment value for the side paper deck Enter a laser write start position for paper fed from the side paper deck according to the registered numeric value 2 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 FRAME X Entering a fine adjustment value in the subscan direction for zooming Enter an image zooming value in the subscan di...

Page 889: ... Factory adjustment value Value after RAM clearance 0 LA SPEED Adjusting the document transport speed at feeder flow read Adjustment method Setting a greater value increases the speed Reducing the image 1 Setting range 30 to 30 Value at shipping Factory adjustment value Value after RAM clearance 0 SORTER ADJUST Sub item Description Level PNCH HLE Adjusting the distance from the paper end to the pu...

Page 890: ...developer is replaced Therefore this message is not necessary when the machine is shipped with the developer for installation STRD POS Automatically adjusting the CCD read position at flow read This is necessary when DF is installed and when ADF is removed and mounted again 1 Operating procedure 1 Select an item to reverse its display Then press the OK key Adjustment automatically starts and stops...

Page 891: ...atic adjustment ends with OK displayed on the screen 5 Since all items are updated in this service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD enter the values into the service label DF WLVL1 2 Adjusting the ADF white level Platen scan Flow read scan 1 Operating procedure 1 Place the user s usual paper on the document table and execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 Read the white level in Book mode to check the transpa...

Page 892: ...xecute this mode to adjust the density automatically 1 Operating procedure 1 Select PD DENS to reverse its display Then press the OK key 2 Paper is fed from Cassette 2 and a 17 tone print pattern is output This print pattern is used in PD ME PD ME Automatically adjusting the density in Character mode Reading PD DENS output pattern 1 Operating procedure 1 Set the PD DENS output pattern on the docum...

Page 893: ...ting one blank copy 3 Select DISPLAY HV STS PRIMARY to display the measurement results COPIER FUNCTION CST Sub item Description Level MF A4R MF A6R MF A4 Registering the basic paper width of the manual feeder A4R width 210 mm A6R width 105 mm A4 width 297 mm For micro adjustment after basic width registration select MF A4R MF A6R or MF A4 from COP COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ 1 Operating procedure 1 Plac...

Page 894: ...ted paper conforms to the standard Note This machine does not allow nip width adjustment This item is used for nip width checking only COPIER FUNCTION PANEL Sub item Description Level LCD CHK Checking the LCD display for missing dots 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item and press the OK key to start operation The front of the panel lights repeatedly in order of white black red green and blue C...

Page 895: ... the coordinate positions on the analog touchpanel 1 Operating procedure Align the press positions on the touchpanel and the coordinate positions on the LCD section If the LCD section has been replaced execute this service mode 1 Select TOUCHCHK to reverse its display Then press the OK key 2 Press sequentially the nine positive signs that appear on the touchpanel in order Key Screen Display 0 to 9...

Page 896: ... 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item 2 Enter the code of the motor from the ten key pad 3 Press the OK key 4 Press MTR ON to check its operation MTR ON Starting the motor operation check 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item and press the OK key to repeat ON and OFF in the following pattern 20 second ON OFF SL Specifying a solenoid to check its operation Range 1 to 9 1 Operating procedure ...

Page 897: ...d motor cassette pedestal M2 4 First paper ejection motor M4 12 Deck paper feed motor deck M1 5 Bottle rotation motor M5 13 Deck lifter motor deck M2 6 Cassette 1 paper feed motor M6 14 Second paper ejection motor 2 3 paper ejection M1 7 Cassette 2 paper feed motor M7 15 Third paper ejection motor 2 3 paper ejection M2 8 Duplex motor iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F only M10 16 Buffer pass motor M1 1 Casse...

Page 898: ...ontroller circuit board The RAM is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON 1 Operating procedure 1 Select COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT to print out the contents of the service mode 2 Select this item and press the OK key 3 Turn the main power switch OFF and ON 4 Enter the P PRINT output data as required JAM HIST Clearing the jam history The jam history is cleared when the OK key ...

Page 899: ...NTER DRBL 2 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item and press the OK key OPTION Resetting a service mode OPTION to default values after RAM clearance The service mode is reset when the OK key is pressed This clears data in the main controller DC controller and reader controller 1 Operating procedure 1 Select COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT to print the contents of the service mode 2 Select this it...

Page 900: ...M Clearing the alarm log The alarm log is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item and press the OK key 2 Turn the main power switch OFF and ON SLT CLR Clearing the salutation setting 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item and press the OK key SND STUP Clearing the send read settings The send read settings are cleared when the main power sw...

Page 901: ...g USER PRT Printing out the user mode list 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key to start printing LBL PRNT Printing out the service label 1 Operating procedure 1 Load A4 or LTR paper on Cassette 1 2 Select this item 3 Press the OK key to start printing PRE EXP Checking the pre exposure lamp LED 1 Operating procedure 1 Press this item to reverse its display 2 Press the OK key...

Page 902: ...1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key to start printing KEY HIST Printing out the operating section key input history 2 Operating procedure 1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key to start printing HIST PRT Printing out the jam history and error history 2 Operating procedure 1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key to start printing TRS DATA Transferring memory received data to the box 2 Operating proc...

Page 903: ... data management information storage area 3 PDL related file storage area 4 Firmware address book file storage area 5 MEAP area 6 Address book area Remarks HD CLEAR shall be indispensable for 4 and 6 HD CHECK Checking and restoring the partition specified by CHK TYPE 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key 3 The result 1 OK 2 NG hardware 3 NG software restored alternative secto...

Page 904: ...justing document width detection by DF A5R width 1 TRY LTR Automatically adjusting document width detection by DF LTR width 1 TRY LTRR Automatically adjusting document width detection by DF LTRR width 1 FEED CHK Checking ADF paper feed operation 1 Operating procedure 1 Press FEED CHK to reverse its display 2 Enter a part corresponding number from the ten key pad 3 Press the OK key 4 Press FEED ON ...

Page 905: ...g procedure 1 Press SL CHK to reverse its display 2 Enter a part corresponding number from the ten key pad 3 Press the OK key 4 Press SL ON to check ADF solenoid operation Part corresponding number 0 Pressurizing solenoid 1 Stamping solenoid Value at shipping Factory adjustment value Value after RAM clearance 0 SL ON Starting solenoid operation 1 Operating procedure Operation specifications shall ...

Page 906: ...DF roller 1 While the roller is being rotated automatically by a motor press alcohol moistened lens cleaning paper against the roller for cleaning Operating procedure 1 Press ROLL CLN to reverse its display 2 While the roller is rotating press alcohol moistened lens cleaning paper against the roller for cleaning 3 Press ROLL CLN to reverse its display Press the OK key to stop the roller FEED ON Ch...

Page 907: ...paper down sequence table 1 Setting range 0 OFF Default 1 Priority to productivity control temperature fixed at 10deg C 2 Control temperature fixed at 6deg C 3 Control temperature fixed at 3deg C 4 Priority to fixing control temperature fixed at 3deg C 5 Control temperature fixed at 6deg C 6 Control temperature fixed at 10deg C 7 Control temperature fixed at 15deg C TRANS SW Switching transfer hig...

Page 908: ... Note This setting is cleared if APVC is executed with a new drum unit or if a service mode FUNCTION D GAMMA is executed 1 Setting range 0 No UP Default 1 50 mA UP 2 100 mA UP TEMPCON2 Improving fixing Increasing the fixing temperature Note Valid for iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F only 1 Setting range 0 OFF Default 1 Priority to productivity control temperature fixed at 10deg C 2 Control temperature fixe...

Page 909: ...urn the main power switch OFF and ON W SCNR Setting whether a scanner is present Copy model 1 Setting range 0 Printer model Default 1 Model with scanner FTPTXPN Specifying the send destination port FTP number 1 Setting range 0 to 65535 Default 21 DFDST L1 Adjusting the dust detection level when DF is used Inter paper correction Setting a greater value makes it easy to detect even small particles 1...

Page 910: ... Count B4 as the small size Default 1 Count B4 as the large size FIX CLN Setting the timing at which the fixing pressure roller is cleaned 2 Setting range 0 No cleaning Default 1 Once every 500 sheets at 225deg C regulated temperature and 60 second idling 2 Once every 200 sheets at 225deg C regulated temperature and 60 second idling 3 Once every 100 sheets at 225deg C regulated temperature and 60 ...

Page 911: ...is used to isolate the data contents and image processing 2 Setting range 0 Usual operation Default 1 Print out with no change SHARP Changing the sharpness level Setting the central value 2 Setting range 1 to 5 Default 3 COTDPC D Saving the toner Potential VD low 2 Setting range 0 No saving Default 1 Down about 10 2 Down about 20 3 Down about 30 RMT LANG Changing the remote UI language from web 2 ...

Page 912: ...eserved FAN EXTN Setting the post job fan extension mode 2 Setting range 0 OFF Default 1 ON SMTPTXPN Changing the SMTP send port number 2 Setting range 0 to 65535 units of 1 Default 25 SMTPRXPN Changing the SMTP send port number 2 Setting range 0 to 65535 units of 1 Default 25 POP3PN Changing the POP receive port number 2 Setting range 0 to 65535 units of 1 Default 110 RUI DSP Setting whether to d...

Page 913: ...d by DF This is targeted at LTR notified of by DF 2 Setting range 0 LTR Default 1 G LTR 2 A LTR 3 EXECTIVE 4 LTR ORG LTRR Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF This is targeted at LTR R notified of by DF 2 Setting range 0 LTR R Default 1 G LTR R 2 A LTR R 3 OFFICIO 4 E OFFICIO 5 EXECTIVE R 6 LTR R ORG LDR Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF This is t...

Page 914: ...Default UI FAX Setting whether or not to display the fax screen of the operating section 2 Setting range 0 Do not display 1 Display Default UI EXT Setting whether or not to display the extended screen of the operating section 2 Setting range 0 Do not display 1 Display Default NEGA GST Making additional setting about the pre exposure sequence excluding laser 2 Setting range 0 Environmental control ...

Page 915: ...TP server Default 1 Do not use NS GSAPI Limiting the use of GSSAPI in SMTP authentication This is set to limit the use of GSSAPI in SMTP authentication 2 Setting range 0 Dependent on the SMTP server Default 1 Do not use NS NTLM Limiting the use of NTLM in SMTP authentication This is set to limit the use of NTLM in SMTP authentication 2 Setting range 0 Dependent on the SMTP server Default 1 Do not ...

Page 916: ...t 1 Do not use MEAP PN Changing the HTTP port number of the MEAP application 2 Setting range 0 to 65535 Default 8000 SVMD ENT Switching how to enter service mode 2 0 User mode key Simultaneous press of 2 and User mode Default 1 User mode key Simultaneous press of 4 and 9 User mode SSH SW Turning the SSH server function ON or OFF 2 Setting range 0 OFF Default 1 ON RMT LGIN Turning remote login to t...

Page 917: ...T status connection port number 2 Setting range 1 to 65535 Default 20000 MEAP DSP Turning screen transition from MEAP to Native ON or OFF 2 Setting range 0 OFF Transition to the Native screen Default 1 ON No transition to the Native screen ANIM SW Turn MEAP application error jam screen display ON or OFF 2 Setting range 0 OFF Display warning screen Default 1 ON Do not display warning screen MEAP SS...

Page 918: ... at shipping Value after RAM clearance 101 Cannot be changed COUNTER2to 6 Setting Software counters 2 to 6 on the User mode screen 1 Setting range 0 to 999 CONTROL Limiting the user of a control card for a PDL job 1 Setting range 0 Do not use Default 1 Use B4 L CNT Setting whether to count B4 as the large size or the small size on Software counters 1 to 6 1 Setting range 0 Small size Default 1 Lar...

Page 919: ...lPrint and PDLPrint in the PRINT category 1 Counting ReportPrint SendLocalPrint and PDLPrint in the PRINT category CNT SW Switching the charging counter and default display items 1 Setting range When the set value is 0 Default 101 Total 1 When the set value is 1 102 Total 2 202 Copy total 2 127 Total A Total 2 When the set value is 2 101 Total 1 104 Total small 103 Total large 501 Scan total 1 REM...

Page 920: ...No Default 1 Yes TRY STP Setting output or no output in the tray full state 2 Setting range 0 Ordinary mode Interrupt when the finisher tray is full Default 1 Interrupt by height detection only MF LG ST Setting the long mode key 2 Setting range 0 Ordinary Default 1 Display a long mode key on the corresponding mode screen CNT DISP Setting whether or not to display a serial number when the counter c...

Page 921: ...de Japan HDCR DSP Setting whether or not display HDD clearance in User mode and changing the contents of clearance 2 Setting range 1 Clear once with 0 Default 2 Clear once with random data 3 Clear three times with random data 2 JOB INVL Setting the job interval at interrupt 2 Setting range 0 Output the next job continuously in interrupt copying Standard Default 1 Start outputting the next job afte...

Page 922: ...m RUI by three authentication failures 2 Setting procedure 0 Invalid Default 1 Valid CTM S06 Setting whether or not to erase the password from the export file of the file send address 2 Setting range 0 Do not erase the password from the export file Default 1 Erase the password from the export file CTM S07 Setting whether or not to erase the RUI address display or the send password source display o...

Page 923: ...rmit split send in IFAX Simple mode transmission AFN PSWD Limiting access in User mode 2 Setting range 0 OFF Transition to the User mode screen with no password request Default 1 ON Transition to the User mode screen after password matching PTJAM RC Turning PDL jam recovery ON or OFF 2 Setting range 0 OFF Do not recover 1 ON Recover Default SLP SLCT Setting whether or not to use a network applicat...

Page 924: ...et as the large size Total A Total excluding local and remote copies Total B Total excluding local and remote copies and box prints Copy Local and remote copies Copy A Local and remote copies and box prints Print PDL report and box prints Print A PDL and report prints Scan Black and white and color scans T 16 50 No Counter Description Support 101 Total 1 yes 102 Total 2 yes 103 Total Large yes 104...

Page 925: ... A Full color 1 131 Total A Full color 2 132 Total A Black and white 1 yes 133 Total A Black and white 2 yes 134 Total A Monochrome Large 135 Total A Monochrome Small 136 Total A Black and white Large yes 137 Total A Black and white Small yes 138 Total A1 Duplex 139 Total A2 Duplex 140 Large A Duplex 141 Small A Duplex 142 Total A Monochrome 1 143 Total A Monochrome 2 144 Total A Full color Large ...

Page 926: ...white Small yes 162 Total B1 Duplex 163 Total B2 Duplex 164 Large B Duplex 165 Small B Duplex 166 Total B Monochrome 1 167 Total B Monochrome 2 168 Total B Full color Large 169 Total B Full color Small 170 Total B Full color Monochrome Large 171 Total B Full color Monochrome Small 172 Total B Full color Monochrome 2 173 Total B Full color Monochrome 1 201 Copy Total 1 yes 202 Copy Total 2 yes 203 ...

Page 927: ...Copy Full color Small 225 Copy Monochrome Large 226 Copy Monochrome Small 227 Copy Black and white Large yes 228 Copy Black and white Small yes 229 Copy Full color Monochrome Large 230 Copy Full color Monochrome Small 231 Copy Full color Monochrome 2 232 Copy Full color Monochrome 1 233 Copy Full color Large Duplex 234 Copy Full color Small Duplex 235 Copy Monochrome Large Duplex 236 Copy Monochro...

Page 928: ...lor Small Duplex 263 Copy A Monochrome Large Duplex 264 Copy A Monochrome Small Duplex 265 Copy A Black and white Large Duplex 266 Copy A Black and white Small Duplex 273 Local copy Full color 1 274 Local copy Full color 2 275 Local copy Monochrome 1 276 Local copy Monochrome 2 277 Local copy Black and white 1 yes 278 Local copy Black and white 2 yes 279 Local copy Full color Large 280 Local copy ...

Page 929: ...mote copy Full color Large 009 Remote copy Full color Small 010 Remote copy Monochrome Large 011 Remote copy Monochrome Small 012 Remote copy Black and white Large yes 013 Remote copy Black and white Small yes 014 Remote copy Full color Monochrome Large 015 Remote copy Full color Monochrome Small 016 Remote copy Full color Monochrome 2 017 Remote copy Full color Monochrome 1 018 Remote copy Full c...

Page 930: ...d white Large yes 320 Print Black and white Small yes 321 Print Full color Monochrome Large 322 Print Full color Monochrome Small 323 Print Full color Monochrome 2 324 Print Full color Monochrome 1 325 Print Full color Large Duplex 326 Print Full color Small Duplex 327 Print Monochrome Large Duplex 328 Print Monochrome Small Duplex 329 Print Black and white Large Duplex 330 Print Black and white S...

Page 931: ...y Print Monochrome Small 405 Copy Print Monochrome 2 406 Copy Print Monochrome 1 407 Copy Print Full color Monochrome Large 408 Copy Print Full color Monochrome Small 409 Copy Print Full color Monochrome 2 410 Copy Print Full color Monochrome 1 411 Copy Print Large 412 Copy Print Small 413 Copy Print 2 414 Copy Print 1 415 Copy Print Monochrome Large 416 Copy Print Monochrome Small 417 Copy Print ...

Page 932: ...6 Box print Full color 2 607 Box print Monochrome 1 608 Box print Monochrome 2 609 Box print Black and white 1 yes 610 Box print Black and white 2 yes 611 Box print Full color Large 612 Box print Full color Small 613 Box print Monochrome Large 614 Box print Monochrome Small 615 Box print Black and white Large yes 616 Box print Black and white Small yes 617 Box print Full color Monochrome Large 618...

Page 933: ...ve print Full color Small 713 Receive print Gray scale Large 714 Receive print Gray scale Small 715 Receive print Monochrome Large yes 716 Receive print Monochrome Small yes 717 Receive print Full color Gray scale Large 718 Receive print Full color Gray scale Small 719 Receive print Full color Gray scale 2 720 Receive print Full color Gray scale 1 721 Receive print Full color Large Duplex 722 Rece...

Page 934: ...Gray scale Small 819 Report print Full color Gray scale 2 820 Report print Full color Gray scale 1 821 Report print Full color Large Duplex 822 Report print Full color Small Duplex 823 Report print Gray scale Large Duplex 824 Report print Gray scale Small Duplex 825 Report print Monochrome Large Duplex 826 Report print Monochrome Small Duplex 901 Copy scan total 1 Color 902 Copy scan total 1 Black...

Page 935: ...can total 6 Black and white yes 931 Send scan total 7 Color 932 Send scan total 7 Black and white 933 Send scan total 8 Color 934 Send scan total 8 Black and white 935 Universal send scan total Color 936 Universal send scan total Black and white 937 Box scan Color 938 Box scan Black and white 939 Remote scan Color 940 Remote scan Black and white yes 941 Send scan FAX Color 942 Send scan FAX Black ...

Page 936: ...lor 958 Send scan Box Black and white COPIER OPTION CST Sub item Description Level ENV1 2 Registering Envelope cassette ENV1 2 1 Setting range 21 ISO C5 Default 22 COM10 23 Monarch 24 DL 25 ISO B5 26 Western style No 4 U1 NAMEto U4 NAME Setting whether or not to display a paper name when a paper size group U1 to U4 has been detected 2 Setting range 0 Display U1 U2 U3 or U4 on the touchpanel 1 Disp...

Page 937: ...8 Bolivian OFFICIO 29 Argentine LETTER U4 Default 30 Argentine LETTER R 31 Governmental LETTER U1 Default 32 Governmental LETTER R 34 Governmental LEGAL U3 Default 35 FOLIO 36 Argentine OFFICIO 37 Mexican OFFICIO 38 EXECUTIVE COPIER OPTION ACC Sub item Description Level COIN Switching the coin vendor Set whether the coin vendor management mode can be entered or not 1 Setting range 0 OFF Default 1 ...

Page 938: ...ONT Setting the EFI controller connection 1 Setting range 0 Usual operation Default AP OPT Permitting or prohibiting printing from the PrintMe application installed in the PS print server unit 2 Setting range 0 Permit printing by a specified account 1 Permit printing irrespective of the account Default 2 Prohibit printing except by specified department ID AP ACCNT Setting a department ID for a pri...

Page 939: ...per Default 2 Thick paper 3 Envelope 4 tracing paper 5 OHP transparency 6 Postcard 7 Label paper 8 Bond paper MOD SLCT Setting a paper mode for weak bias to the transfer tip 1 Setting range 1 Simplex Default 2 Automatic duplex feed Second side Cassette feed 3 Manual duplex feed Second side Manual feed ENV SLCT Setting the environment for weak bias to the transfer tip 1 Setting range 1 to 5 Default...

Page 940: ...LIPS installation status in transfer invalidation and executing transfer invalidation 2 TR LIPS Acquiring a transfer license key for LIPS in transfer invalidation 2 ST PDFDR Displaying the PDF direct function installation status in transfer invalidation and executing transfer invalidation 2 TR PDFDR Acquiring a transfer license key for the PDF direct function in transfer invalidation 2 ST SCR Disp...

Page 941: ...or not to detect a mixed document of A B size and inch size 1 Setting value 0 Do not detect Default 1 Detect SORTER OPTION Sub item Description Level BLNK SW Setting the margin width W on each side of the folding position when the saddle stitcher is used 1 Setting value 0 Ordinary width 5 mm 1 Large width 10 mm Value at shipping Value after RAM clearance 1 MD SPRTN Setting the finisher function li...

Page 942: ...l FONTDL Setting whether or not to display the font service setting screen for list display by the PS kanji font downloader 1 Setting value 0 Do not display Default 1 Display MENU 1 to MENU 4 Setting whether or not to display Levels 1 to 4 of the printer setting menu 2 Setting value 0 Do not display 1 Display Value at shipping Value after RAM clearance 0 ...

Page 943: ...d 4 Totally white 00H 5 Halftone 80H Error diffusion method T0BIC 6 Halftone 80H Dither screen method 7 Totally black FFH 8 Horizontal line space 27 dots line width 40 dots 9 Horizontal line space 50 dots line width 60 dots 10 Horizontal line space 3 dots line width 2 dots 11 Halftone 60H Error diffusion method T0BIC 12 Halftone 60H Dither screen method 13 Halftone 30H Error diffusion method T0BIC...

Page 944: ... key and the Start key If NG is displayed the TCP IP setting of the local machine may be wrong Return to Step 3 and check the setting again If OK is displayed the TCP IP setting of the local machine seems correct but the network controller main controller circuit board may be faulty Check the controller at Step 7 Since the loopback address signal is returned before the network controller the TCP I...

Page 945: ...blems about the network setting of the local machine or the network controller Then the problem may be attributable to the user network environment Report this to the system administrator and request action F 16 17 Result OK NG IP address input ...

Page 946: ...o 00000000 1 COPY Total copy counter This counter is incremented when a copy is created and ejected out of the printer After 99999999 the count returns to 00000000 1 PDL PRT PDL print counter This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a print is ejected out of the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in PDL printing The increment is 0 for blank print and 5 each for a...

Page 947: ...counter This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a print is ejected out of the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in report printing The increment is 0 for blank print and 1each for a large or small print The count can be cleared After 99999999 the count returns to 00000000 1 2 SIDE Duplex copy print counter This counter is incremented with the charging counter w...

Page 948: ...he number of sheets fed from the deck paper feed unit is displayed Irrespective of the paper size large or small this counter is incremented one After 99999999 the count returns to 00000000 1 2 SIDE Duplex paper feed total counter The number of duplex fed sheets is displayed Irrespective of the paper size large or small this counter is incremented one After 99999999 the count returns to 00000000 1...

Page 949: ...m Description Level LSR MTR Scanner motor counter This counter counts motor rotations If the time until the motor run become stable is shorter than the average however this counter is not incremented Average time iR2230 2870 About 1 3 seconds iR3570 4570 About 3 3 seconds 1 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 Sub item Description Level TR ROLL Transfer roller counter Irrespective of the paper size large or smal...

Page 950: ...his counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size 1 FX LW RL Lower fixing roller counter This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size 1 FX FILM Fixing film counter This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size 1 FX CL RL Fixing cleaning roller counter This counter is incremented two for the large size and o...

Page 951: ...d duplex mode 1 DF FD RL ADF transport roller counter Irrespective of the paper size large or small this counter is incremented one for each document in simplex mode and three for each read document front back and idle transfer in duplex mode 1 LNT TAPE ADF dust collection tape counter Irrespective of the paper size large or small this counter is incremented one for each read document not side bot...

Page 952: ...ter 1 SADDL E Saddle paper transport counter The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other 1 SDL STPL Saddle stapling counter 1 PUNCH Punching counter 1 FN BFFRL Buffer roller counter The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other 1 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 Sub item Description Level ...

Page 953: ...Chapter 17 Upgrading ...

Page 954: ......

Page 955: ... 4 2 1 Outline 17 20 17 4 2 2 Downloading Procedure 17 21 17 4 3 Downloading SDICT 17 23 17 4 3 1 Outline 17 23 17 4 3 2 Downloading Procedure 17 24 17 4 4 Downloading MEAPCONT 17 25 17 4 4 1 Outline 17 25 17 4 4 2 Downloading Procedure 17 26 17 4 5 Downloading KEY 17 27 17 4 5 1 Outline 17 27 17 4 5 2 Downloading Procedure 17 28 17 4 6 Downloading BOOT 17 30 17 4 6 1 Outline 17 30 17 4 6 2 Downlo...

Page 956: ......

Page 957: ...the machine and how they may be upgraded T 17 1 Typ e Type of system software Method of upgrading Remarks SST ROM DIMM replaceme nt Machine System main controller Yes No The machine controller is also used to control the Super G3 Fax Board Q1 Language language mode Yes No RUI remote user interface Yes No Boot boot program Yes Yes MEAP CONT MEAP library Yes No SDICT OCR dictionary Yes No KEY encryp...

Page 958: ...ypes Fin S1 Finisher S1 Yes No A special service tool downloader PCB FY9 2034 is needed Fin_QR Finisher Q3 Saddle Finisher Q4 Yes No A special service tool downloader PCB FY9 2034 is needed Typ e Type of system software Method of upgrading Remarks SST ROM DIMM replaceme nt Initializing the HDD Downloading system software Uploading backup data Downloading backup data Backup data System software HDD...

Page 959: ...olding down 2 8 F 17 2 Use safe mode for the following when you have replaced the HDD when the system fails to start up normally The following table shows the functions that may be used in download mode with the SST in use Main power switch ON on keypad 2 8 on keypad 1 7 Boot ROM Safe mode program Boot program Download mode A Download mode B HDD COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD SYSTEM program In se...

Page 960: ...ine starts up When you turn off and then on the main power switch for a second time the machine will start up using the new version of the system software Function Download mode Normal mode download mode B Safe mode download mode A Formatting the HDD Entire HDD BOOTDEV FSTDEV TMP_GEN TMP_PSS TMP_FAX APL_SEND APL_MEAP APL_GEN PDL_DEV FSTCDEV Downloading the system software System Language RUI Boot ...

Page 961: ...e Do Download Mode wnload Mode iR2270i JPjaxxxx MN dsh iR2270i JPjaxxxx MN dsh iR2270iM JPjaxxxx 1F77 MN PRG iR2270iM JPjaxxxx 1F77 MN PRG iR2270iM ZZjaxxxx 49AD iR2270iM ZZjaxxxx 49AD PRG PRG iR2270iW iR2270iW JPjaxxxx 5C16 MN PRG JPjaxxxx 5C16 MN PRG iR2270iW iR2270iW ZZjaxxxx A825 PRG ZZjaxxxx A825 PRG iR2270iF JPjaxxxx DE96 ICC iR2270iF JPjaxxxx DE96 ICC PRG PRG iR2270iW iR2270iW ZZjaxxxx A825...

Page 962: ...F 17 4 HDD Boot ROM Flash ROM System Software ...

Page 963: ...e System CD to the SST Preparatory Work Items to Prepare PC to which the SST version 3 01 or later has been installed System CD for the iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series Registering the System Software 1 Start up the PC 2 Set the system CD in the PC 3 Start up the SST 4 Click Register System Software F 17 5 5 Select the drive in which you have set the System CD and click SEARCH ...

Page 964: ... F 17 6 6 The list of system software found on the System CD appears Remove the check from the folders and software you will not need then click REGISTER F 17 7 7 When the result of registration is indicated click OK ...

Page 965: ... software for the iR4570 3570 2870 2270 has been registered Twisted pair cross cable 10Base T Category 3 or 5 100Base TX Category 5 Procedure 1 Start up the PC 2 Check the network settings of the PC At the command prompt type IPCONFIG and press the Return key Check to see that the network settings are as follows IP address 172 16 1 160 subnet mask 255 255 255 0 default gateway any Do not use the f...

Page 966: ...4 Connect the PC to the machine using a cross cable iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series F 17 10 C W i n d ow s 2 0 0 0 I P C o n f i g u ra t i o n M i c r o s o f t W i n d ow s 2 0 0 0 Ve r s i o n 5 0 0 2 1 9 5 C C o py r i g h t 1 9 8 5 1 9 9 9 M i n c r o s o f t C o r p E t h e r n e t a d a p t e r L o c a l A r e a C o n n e c t i o n C o n n e c t i o n s p e c i f i c D N S S u f f i x I P A d ...

Page 967: ... Turn on the main power switch while holding down 1 7 When the machine has started up make the following selections COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD Safe Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down 2 8 6 Start up the Service Support Tool 7 Select the model of the machine to connect iR2270 3570 F 17 11 8 Click START ...

Page 968: ...F 17 12 ...

Page 969: ...e main controller The information needed for partition settings is stored under HDFormat of the iRXXXX F 17 13 1 HDD service part without partition setup 2 Formatting of all partitions in safe mode only 3 HDD after formatting 4 Partition setup information 17 3 2 Formatting Selected Partitions 0008 7382 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 HDD 1 2 3 TMP_GEN TMP_PSS FSTDEV APL_SEND APL_MEAP IMG_MNG AP...

Page 970: ...u have selected ALL you may execute formatting without registering HDFormat 2 An attempt to format after selecting TMP_FAX in the absence of a fax board will cause an error 3 An attempt to format after selecting FSTCDEV for expansion will cause an 17 3 3 Formatting Procedure 0008 7387 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 1 Click Format HDD HDD TMP_GEN TMP_PSS FSTDEV APL_SEND APL_MEAP IMG_MNG APL_GEN...

Page 971: ...Chapter 17 17 15 F 17 15 2 Select the partitions you want to format Or select ALL F 17 16 3 Click Start 4 When the Confirmation screen has appeared click Execute Formatting ...

Page 972: ...ended click OK F 17 18 6 Start a download session Or turn off and then on the machine to end the work If you have formatted all partitions or formatted BOOTDEV be sure to download System newly Otherwise E602 will occur when you turn on the main power ...

Page 973: ...pan Unlike previous iR controllers however there is only one type of system software Previously one type supported NetWare while the other did not There is now only one type for the machine supporting NetWare 17 4 1 2 Downloading Procedure 0008 7395 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 You can run a downloading session either in normal or safe mode 1 Select the version of the system you want to down...

Page 974: ...iate instructions 5 When you are done with downloading turn off and then on the main power iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series 6 See the upgrade status indicated on the control panel iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch turn off and then on the main power iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series ...

Page 975: ...going session will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up F 17 22 F 17 23 If the machine fails to start up format BOOTDEV using HDFormat and then download such software as System Language and RUI download shell SYSTEM JPja m SYSTEM ZZ SYSTEM JPja w SYSTEM ZZ Upgrading complete Upgrading complete Upgrading complete Writing to HDD XX ...

Page 976: ... If correct You can switch languages by making the following selections in user mode common settings display language change 2 If not correct E744 will be indicated and System Language will be used when the main power is turned off and then on LCD Network PC Language RUI System RUI en RUI it RUI ja System Language Language XXen Language XXit Language XXja RUI XXen RUI XXit RUI XXja Version check N...

Page 977: ...Case of Language 1 Select the version of Language to download RUI Display Language Select using the RUI You can select a different language for a different PC Language Code Language de German en English fr French it Italian ja Japanese Download iR Language XXen XXja RUI XXen XXja SST Service PC iR Main Controller Unit HDD BOOTDEV Language XXen Language XXja RUI XXen RUI XXja ...

Page 978: ...Chapter 17 17 22 F 17 26 2 Click Start F 17 27 3 When the result of the downloading session has appeared click OK ...

Page 979: ...eries Be sure never to turn off the power while the machine is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software Otherwise the ongoing session will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up If the machine fails to start up format BOOTDEV using HDFormat and download such software as System Language and RUI 17 4 3 Downloading SDICT 17 4 3 1 Outline 0009 0391 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570...

Page 980: ... 24 17 4 3 2 Downloading Procedure 0008 7842 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 You can run a downloading session in either normal or safe mode 1 Select the version of SDICT to download F 17 29 2 Click Start F 17 30 ...

Page 981: ...and then on the switch turn off and then on the main power iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software Otherwise the ongoing session will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up If the machine fails to start up format BOOTDEV using HDFormat and download such software as System Language and R...

Page 982: ... 4 2 Downloading Procedure 0008 7844 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 You can execute a downloading session in either normal or safe mode 1 Select the version of MEAPCONT you want to download F 17 32 2 Click Start F 17 33 ...

Page 983: ...urn off and then on the switch turn off and then on the main power iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded software Otherwise the ongoing session will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up If the machine fails to start up format BOOTDEV using HDFormat and download such software as System Langua...

Page 984: ... and XXxp Be sure to download both types 17 4 5 2 Downloading Procedure 0008 9881 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 You can execute a download session in either normal or safe mode 1 Select the version of KEY you want to download F 17 35 2 Click Start ...

Page 985: ... appropriate instructions 5 When you are done turn off and then on the main power iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series 6 See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch turn off and then on the main power iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series ...

Page 986: ...3570 iR4570 iR3530 Boot registered in the SST may be used in common for various types of boot ROMs You cannot change the type of a boot ROM by means of downloading F 17 38 If a downloading session fails you will have to replace the boot ROM 17 4 6 2 Downloading Procedure 0008 7422 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 You can execute a downloading session in either normal or safe mode SST Service PC ...

Page 987: ...Chapter 17 17 31 1 Select the version of BOOT to download F 17 39 2 Click Start F 17 40 3 When the downloading session has ended click OK ...

Page 988: ...on the switch turn off and then on the main power iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a download session or writing downloaded system software Otherwise the ongoing write operation will be suspended and the machine may not start up If the machine fails to start up format BOOTDEV using HDFormat and download such software as System Language and RU...

Page 989: ...tem software F 17 42 You will not be able to download Rcon unless the DC controller has started up normally as otherwise the power supply control signal will not be valid and as a result the reader unit remains without power 17 4 7 2 Downloading Procedure 0008 7824 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 You can execute a downloading session in either normal or safe mode In the case of safe mode howeve...

Page 990: ...Chapter 17 17 34 Downloading Rcon 1 Select the version of Rcon to download F 17 43 2 Click Start F 17 44 3 When the downloading session has ended click OK ...

Page 991: ...main power iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series Be sure never to turn off the machine while it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system software Otherwise the machine may not be able to start up If the machine fails to start up format BOOTDEV using HDFormat and download such software as System Language and RUI If an error code is indicated be sure to download appropriate firmware 17...

Page 992: ...3570 iR4570 iR3530 You will have to use normal mode for downloading 1 Select the version of G3FAX you want to download F 17 47 iR XXXX G3Fax Service PC iR XXXX Multi Fax Board D1 2 line Download Downloading is possible only in normal mode G3Fax Flash ROM DIMM G3Fax Flash ROM DIMM Upgrading is also possible by replacing the DIMM Main controller unit CPU SST ...

Page 993: ...turn off and then on the main power of the machine iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series 5 See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the machine turn off and then on the main power iR4570 570 2870 2270 Series ...

Page 994: ...e 0008 7845 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 SramImg is data that is stored in the SRAM of the main controller PCB while MeapBack is a MEAP application and its data stored on the HDD T 17 5 If you are replacing the main controller PCB you can transfer such data as parts counter readings by uploading the data before replacement and downloading it after replacement If you are replacing the HDD or ...

Page 995: ...0 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Use safe mode for uploading 1 Select Upload Data F 17 51 Service PC Main controller unit Main controller PCB SramImg bin iR XXXX SramImg Meapback SST HDD Meapback bin System Printer unit SRAM Uploading Downloading Downloading is possible only in safe mode ...

Page 996: ...Chapter 17 17 40 2 Select the data you want to back up F 17 52 3 Click Start F 17 53 4 Click Save ...

Page 997: ...Chapter 17 17 41 F 17 54 5 Click OK F 17 55 17 4 9 3 Downloading Procedur 0008 7856 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR3530 Use safe mode for downloading 1 Select Download Data ...

Page 998: ...Chapter 17 17 42 F 17 56 2 Select the data to download F 17 57 3 Click Start ...

Page 999: ...nd then on the main power iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series 6 See the status of upgrading indicated on the control panel of the machine iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series When a message appears asking you to turn off and then on the switch turn off and then on the main power iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series ...

Page 1000: ...hile it is executing a downloading session or writing downloaded system software The write operation will be suspended and the machine may fail to start up If the machine fails to start up format BOOTDEV using HDFormat and download System Language and RUI ...

Page 1001: ...Chapter 18 Service Tools ...

Page 1002: ......

Page 1003: ...Contents Contents 18 1 Special Tools 18 1 18 2 Oils and Solvents 18 2 ...

Page 1004: ......

Page 1005: ...carry one B each group of 5 service engineers is expected to carry one C each workshop is expected to carry one Tool name Tool No Ran k Shape Uses Digital multimeter FY9 2002 A For making electrical checks Cover switch TKN 0093 A Tester extension pin FY9 3038 A As an addition when making an electrical check Tester extension pin L shipped FY9 3039 A As an addition when making an electrical check NA...

Page 1006: ...l alcohol may be substituted Solvent cleaning e g metal soiling with oil or toner fluorine family hydrocarbon chlorine family hydrocarbon alcohol Do not bring near fire Procure locally MEK may be substituted Lubricant mineral oil paraffin family CK 0524 100 cc Lubricant drive mechanism sliding mechanism silicone oil CK 0551 20 g Lubricant EM 50L gear special oil special solid lubricating agent lit...

Page 1007: ...Jan 31 2005 ...

Page 1008: ......

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands